TMS320F2801-Q1_技术文档

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

www.ti.com

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

TMS320F280x, TMS320C280x, TMS320F2801x digital signal processors

•

Three 32-bit CPU timers

Enhanced control peripherals

– Up to 16 PWM outputs

– Up to 6 HRPWM outputs with 150-ps MEP

resolution

– Up to four capture inputs

– Up to two quadrature encoder interfaces

– Up to six 32-bit/six 16-bit timers

Serial port peripherals

– Up to 4 SPI modules

– Up to 2 SCI (UART) modules

– Up to 2 CAN modules

– One Inter-Integrated-Circuit (I2C) bus

12-bit ADC, 16 channels

1 Features

•

High-performance static CMOS technology

– 100 MHz (10-ns cycle time)

– 60 MHz (16.67-ns cycle time)

– Low-power (1.8-V core, 3.3-V I/O) design

JTAG boundary scan support

– IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard Test

Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture

High-performance 32-bit CPU (TMS320C28x)

– 16 × 16 and 32 × 32 MAC operations

– 16 × 16 dual MAC

•

– Harvard bus architecture

– Atomic operations

– Fast interrupt response and processing

– Unified memory programming model

– Code-efficient (in C/C++ and Assembly)

On-chip memory

– 2 × 8 channel input multiplexer

– Two sample-and-hold

– Single/simultaneous conversions

– Fast conversion rate:

•

– F2809: 128K × 16 flash, 18K × 16 SARAM

F2808: 64K × 16 flash, 18K × 16 SARAM

F2806: 32K × 16 flash, 10K × 16 SARAM

F2802: 32K × 16 flash, 6K × 16 SARAM

F2801: 16K × 16 flash, 6K × 16 SARAM

F2801x: 16K × 16 flash, 6K × 16 SARAM

– 1K × 16 OTP ROM (flash devices only)

– C2802: 32K × 16 ROM, 6K × 16 SARAM

C2801: 16K × 16 ROM, 6K × 16 SARAM

Boot ROM (4K × 16)

– With software boot modes (via SCI, SPI, CAN,

I2C, and parallel I/O)

– Standard math tables

Clock and system control

– On-chip oscillator

– Watchdog timer module

Any GPIO A pin can be connected to one of the

three external core interrupts

Peripheral Interrupt Expansion (PIE) block that

supports all 43 peripheral interrupts

Endianness: Little endian

128-bit security key/lock

– Protects flash/OTP/L0/L1 blocks

– Prevents firmware reverse-engineering

80 ns - 12.5 MSPS (F2809 only)

160 ns - 6.25 MSPS (280x)

267 ns - 3.75 MSPS (F2801x)

– Internal or external reference

Up to 35 individually programmable, multiplexed

GPIO pins with input filtering

Advanced emulation features

– Analysis and breakpoint functions

– Real-time debug via hardware

Development support includes

– ANSI C/C++ compiler/assembler/linker

– Code Composer Studio^™IDE

– SYS/BIOS

– Digital motor control and digital power software

libraries

Low-power modes and power savings

– IDLE, STANDBY, HALT modes supported

– Disable individual peripheral clocks

Package options

•

– Thin quad flatpack (PZ)

– MicroStar BGA^™(GGM, ZGM)

Temperature options

– A: –40°C to 85°C (PZ, GGM, ZGM)

– S: –40°C to 125°C (PZ, GGM, ZGM)

– Q: –40°C to 125°C (PZ)

•

(AEC-Q100 qualification for automotive

applications)

An IMPORTANT NOTICE at the end of this data sheet addresses availability, warranty, changes, use in safety-critical applications,

Submit Document Feedback

1

intellectual property matters and other important disclaimers. PRODUCTION DATA.

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

•

Digital power

2 Applications

•

Motor drive and control

3 Description

The TMS320F2809, TMS320F2809-Q1, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2808-Q1 TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802,

TMS320F2801-Q1, TMS320F28015-Q1, TMS320F28016-Q1, TMS320C2802-Q1, and TMS320C2801 devices,

members of the TMS320C28x DSP generation, are highly integrated, high-performance solutions for demanding

control applications.

Throughout this document, TMS320F2809, TMS320F2809-Q1 TMS320F2808, TMS320F2808-Q1

TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802-Q1, TMS320F2801-Q1, TMS320C2802, TMS320C2801, TMS320F28015-Q1,

and TMS320F28016-Q1 are abbreviated as F2809, F2808, F2806, F2802-Q1, F2801-Q1, C2802, C2801,

F28015-Q1, and F28016-Q1, respectively. TMS320F28015-Q1 and TMS320F28016-Q1 are abbreviated as

F2801x. Device Comparison (100-MHz Devices) and Device Comparison (60-MHz Devices) provide a summary

of features for each device.

Device Information

PART NUMBER⁽¹⁾

TMS320F2809ZGM

PACKAGE

BODY SIZE

BGA MicroStar (100)

LQFP (100)

10.0 mm × 10.0 mm

14.0 mm × 14.0 mm

TMS320F2808ZGM

TMS320F2806ZGM

TMS320F2802ZGM

TMS320F2801ZGM

TMS320C2802ZGM

TMS320C2801ZGM

TMS320F28016ZGM

TMS320F28015ZGM

TMS320F2809GGM

TMS320F2808GGM

TMS320F2806GGM

TMS320F2802GGM

TMS320F2801GGM

TMS320C2802GGM

TMS320C2801GGM

TMS320F28016GGM

TMS320F28015GGM

TMS320F2809PZ

TMS320F2808PZ

LQFP (100)

TMS320F2806PZ

LQFP (100)

TMS320F2802PZ

LQFP (100)

TMS320F2801PZ

LQFP (100)

TMS320C2802PZ

TMS320C2801PZ

TMS320F28016PZ

TMS320F28015PZ

LQFP (100)

(1) For more information on these devices, see Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable Information.

2

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

4 Functional Block Diagram

Memory Bus

Real-Time JTAG

(TDI, TDO, TRST, TCK,

TMS, EMU0, EMU1)

TINT0

32-bit CPU TIMER 0

TINT1

TINT2

7

32-bit CPU TIMER 1

32-bit CPU TIMER 2

INT14

M0 SARAM

1K x 16

PIE

(96 Interrupts)^(A)

M1 SARAM

1K x 16

INT[12:1]

NMI, INT13

L0 SARAM

4K x 16

(0-wait)

External Interrupt

Control

32

4

L1 SARAM^(B)

4K x 16

(0-wait)

SCI-A/B

SPI-A/B/C/D

I2C-A

FIFO

16

2

H0 SARAM^(C)

8K x 16

(0-wait)

4

eCAN-A/B (32 mbox)

eQEP1/2

8

GPIOs

(35)

4

ROM

32K x 16 (C2802)

16K x 16 (C2801)

C28x CPU

(100 MHz)

eCAP1/2/3/4

(4 32-bit Timers)

12

6

ePWM1/2/3/4/5/6

(12 PWM Outputs,

6 Trip Zones,

6 16-bit Timers)

FLASH

128K x 16 (F2809)

64K x 16 (F2808)

32K x 16 (F2806)

32K x 16 (F2802)

16K x 16 (F2801)

16K x 16 (F2801x)

SYSCLKOUT

32

System Control

RS

XCLKOUT

XRS

(Oscillator, PLL,

Peripheral Clocking,

Low-Power Modes,

Watchdog)

CLKIN

XCLKIN

X1

OTP^(D)

1K x 16

X2

ADCSOCA/B

Boot ROM

4K x 16

(1-wait state)

SOCA/B

12-Bit ADC

16 Channels

Peripheral Bus

Protected by the code-security module.

A. 43 of the possible 96 interrupts are used on the devices.

B. Not available in F2802, F2801, C2802, and C2801.

C. Not available in F2806, F2802, F2801, C2802, and C2801.

D. The 1K x 16 OTP has been replaced with 1K x 16 ROM for C280x devices.

Figure 4-1. Functional Block Diagram

Submit Document Feedback

3

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Table of Contents

1 Features............................................................................1

2 Applications.....................................................................2

3 Description.......................................................................2

4 Functional Block Diagram.............................................. 3

5 Revision History.............................................................. 5

6 Device Comparison.........................................................6

6.1 Related Products........................................................ 8

7 Terminal Configuration and Functions..........................9

7.1 Pin Diagrams.............................................................. 9

7.2 Signal Descriptions................................................... 14

8 Specifications................................................................ 20

8.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings...................................... 20

8.2 ESD Ratings – Automotive....................................... 21

8.3 ESD Ratings – Commercial...................................... 21

8.4 Recommended Operating Conditions.......................21

8.5 Power Consumption Summary................................. 23

8.6 Electrical Characteristics...........................................29

8.7 Thermal Resistance Characteristics for F280x

8.13 Thermal Design Considerations..............................33

8.14 Timing and Switching Characteristics..................... 34

8.15 On-Chip Analog-to-Digital Converter...................... 60

8.16 Migrating From F280x Devices to C280x Devices..66

8.17 ROM Timing (C280x only).......................................67

9 Detailed Description......................................................68

9.1 Brief Descriptions......................................................68

9.2 Peripherals................................................................75

9.3 Memory Maps ........................................................ 108

9.4 Register Map...........................................................116

9.5 Interrupts.................................................................119

9.6 System Control....................................................... 124

9.7 Low-Power Modes Block........................................ 130

10 Applications, Implementation, and Layout............. 131

10.1 TI Design or Reference Design.............................131

11 Device and Documentation Support........................132

11.1 Getting Started......................................................132

11.2 Device and Development Support Tool

100-Ball GGM Package...............................................31

8.8 Thermal Resistance Characteristics for F280x

100-Pin PZ Package................................................... 31

8.9 Thermal Resistance Characteristics for C280x

100-Ball GGM Package...............................................32

8.10 Thermal Resistance Characteristics for C280x

100-Pin PZ Package................................................... 32

8.11 Thermal Resistance Characteristics for F2809

Nomenclature............................................................133

11.3 Tools and Software................................................135

11.4 Documentation Support........................................ 136

11.5 Support Resources............................................... 138

11.6 Trademarks........................................................... 138

11.7 Electrostatic Discharge Caution............................138

11.8 Glossary................................................................138

12 Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable

100-Ball GGM Package...............................................33

8.12 Thermal Resistance Characteristics for F2809

Information.................................................................. 139

12.1 Packaging Information.......................................... 139

100-Pin PZ Package................................................... 33

4

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

5 Revision History

Changes from March 11, 2019 to February 3, 2021 (from Revision O (March 2019) to Revision P

(February 2021))

Page

•

Global: Updated the numbering format for tables, figures and cross-references throughout the document...... 1

Decsription: Updated part numbers....................................................................................................................2

Device Comparison: Updated part numbers.......................................................................................................6

Pin Diagrams: Updated part numbers................................................................................................................ 9

Device and Development Support Tool Nomenclature: Updated Device Nomenclature image to show -Q1 part

number............................................................................................................................................................133

Submit Document Feedback

5

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

6 Device Comparison

Table 6-1. Device Comparison (100-MHz Devices)

F2809

F2809-Q1

F2808

F2808-Q1

F2806

F2806-Q1

F2802

F2802-Q1

F2801

F2801-Q1

FEATURE

TYPE⁽¹⁾

C2802

10 ns

6K

C2801

10 ns

6K

Instruction cycle (at 100 MHz)

–

10 ns

18K

(L0, L1, M0,

M1, H0)

18K

(L0, L1, M0,

M1, H0)

10K

(L0, L1, M0,

M1)

Single-access RAM (SARAM) (16-bit

word)

6K

–

(L0, M0, M1) (L0, M0, M1) (L0, M0, M1) (L0, M0, M1)

3.3-V on-chip flash (16-bit word)

On-chip ROM (16-bit word)

–

128K

–

64K

–

32K

–

32K

–

16K

–

32K

16K

Code security for on-chip flash/

SARAM/OTP blocks

–

Yes

1K

Yes

1K

Yes

1K

Yes

1K

Yes

1K

Yes

–

Yes

–

Boot ROM (4K x 16)

One-time programmable (OTP) ROM

(16-bit word)

ePWM1/2/3/4 ePWM1/2/3/4 ePWM1/2/3/4

PWM channels

0

ePWM1/2/3

/5/6

ePWM1A/2A/

3A/

4A/5A/6A

ePWM1A/2A/ ePWM1A/2A/ ePWM1A/2A/ ePWM1A/2A/ ePWM1A/2A/ ePWM1A/2A/

HRPWM channels

3A/4A

3A

32-bit CAPTURE inputs or auxiliary

PWM outputs

0

eCAP1/2/3/4 eCAP1/2/3/4 eCAP1/2/3/4

eCAP1/2

eQEP1

eCAP1/2

eQEP1

eCAP1/2

eQEP1

eCAP1/2

eQEP1

32-bit QEP channels (four inputs/

channel)

eQEP1/2

Watchdog timer

–

1

–

0

Yes

80 ns

3

Yes

160 ns

3

Yes

160 ns

3

Yes

160 ns

3

Yes

160 ns

3

Yes

160 ns

3

Yes

160 ns

3

12-Bit, 16-channel ADC conversion time

32-Bit CPU timers

Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)

Serial Communications Interface (SCI)

SPI-A/B/C/D SPI-A/B/C/D SPI-A/B/C/D

SPI-A/B

SCI-A

SPI-A/B

SCI-A

SPI-A/B

SCI-A

SPI-A/B

SCI-A

SCI-A/B

eCAN-A

Enhanced Controller Area Network

(eCAN)

0

eCAN-A/B

eCAN-A

Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)

Digital I/O pins (shared)

External interrupts

0

–

I2C-A

35

I2C-A

35

I2C-A

35

I2C-A

35

I2C-A

35

I2C-A

35

I2C-A

35

3

1.8-V Core, 3.3-V

Supply voltage

I/O

–

Yes

100-Pin PZ

Packaging

100-Ball GGM,

ZGM

(PZ, GGM,

ZGM)

(PZ, GGM,

ZGM)

(PZ, GGM,

ZGM)

(PZ, GGM,

ZGM)

(PZ, GGM,

ZGM)

(PZ, GGM,

ZGM)

(PZ, GGM,

ZGM)

A: –40°C to 85°C

–

(PZ, GGM,

ZGM)

(PZ, GGM,

ZGM)

(PZ, GGM,

ZGM)

(PZ, GGM,

ZGM)

(PZ, GGM,

ZGM)

(PZ, GGM,

ZGM)

(PZ, GGM,

ZGM)

Temperature

options

S: –40°C to 125°C

Q: –40°C to 125°C

(AEC-Q100

–

(PZ)

Qualification)

(1) A type change represents a major functional feature difference in a peripheral module. Within a peripheral type, there may be minor

differences between devices that do not affect the basic functionality of the module. These device-specific differences are listed in the

C2000 real-time control peripherals reference guide and in the peripheral reference guides.

Table 6-2. Device Comparison (60-MHz Devices)

F28016

F28016-Q1

F28015

F28015-Q1

FEATURE

TYPE⁽¹⁾

F2802-60

F2801-60

Instruction cycle (at 60 MHz)

–

16.67 ns

6K

Single-access RAM (SARAM) (16-bit word)

(L0, M0, M1)

3.3-V on-chip flash (16-bit word)

On-chip ROM (16-bit word)

–

32K

–

16K

–

16K

–

16K

–

6

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Table 6-2. Device Comparison (60-MHz Devices) (continued)

F28016

F28016-Q1

F28015

F28015-Q1

FEATURE

TYPE⁽¹⁾

F2802-60

F2801-60

Code security for on-chip flash/SARAM/OTP

blocks

–

Yes

1K

Yes

1K

Yes

1K

Yes

1K

Boot ROM (4K x 16)

One-time programmable (OTP) ROM

(16-bit word)

PWM channels

0

ePWM1/2/3

ePWM1/2/3/4

HRPWM channels

ePWM1A/2A/3A

ePWM1A/2A/3A/4A

32-bit CAPTURE inputs or auxiliary PWM

outputs

0

eCAP1/2

32-bit QEP channels (four inputs/channel)

Watchdog timer

0

–

eQEP1

Yes

eQEP1

Yes

-

Yes

-

Yes

16

No. of channels

16

12-Bit ADC

MSPS

1

3.75

267 ns

3

3.75

267 ns

3

Conversion time

267 ns

3

267 ns

3

32-Bit CPU timers

–

0

–

Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)

Serial Communications Interface (SCI)

Enhanced Controller Area Network (eCAN)

Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)

Digital I/O pins (shared)

SPI-A/B

SCI-A

eCAN-A

I2C-A

35

SPI-A/B

SCI-A

eCAN-A

I2C-A

35

SPI-A

SCI-A

eCAN-A

I2C-A

35

SPI-A

SCI-A

-

I2C-A

35

External interrupts

3

1.8-V Core,

3.3-V I/O

1.8-V Core,

3.3-V I/O

1.8-V Core,

3.3-V I/O

1.8-V Core,

3.3-V I/O

Supply voltage

–

100-Pin PZ

Packaging

–

Yes

100-Ball GGM, ZGM

Yes

A: –40°C to 85°C

(PZ, GGM, ZGM)

(PZ GGM, ZGM)

(PZ, GGM, ZGM)

S: –40°C to 125°C

Temperature options

Q: –40°C to 125°C

(AEC-Q100

–

(PZ)

Qualification)

(1) A type change represents a major functional feature difference in a peripheral module. Within a peripheral type, there may be minor

differences between devices that do not affect the basic functionality of the module. These device-specific differences are listed in the

C2000 real-time control peripherals reference guide and in the peripheral reference guides.

Submit Document Feedback

7

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

6.1 Related Products

For information about other devices in this family of products, see the following links:

TMS320F2837xS Delfino™ Microcontrollers

The Delfino^™TMS320F2837xS is a powerful 32-bit floating-point microcontroller unit (MCU) designed for

advanced closed-loop control applications such as industrial drives and servo motor control; solar inverters and

converters; digital power; transportation; and power line communications. Complete development packages for

digital power and industrial drives are available as part of the powerSUITE and DesignDRIVE initiatives.

8

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

7 Terminal Configuration and Functions

7.1 Pin Diagrams

The TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2808-Q1, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2806-Q1, TMS320F2802,

TMS320F2802-Q1, TMS320F2801, TMS320F2801-Q1, TMS320C2802, TMS320C2801, TMS320F28015,

TMS320F28015-Q1, and TMS320F28016, TMS320F28016-Q1 100-pin PZ low-profile quad flatpack (LQFP) pin

assignments are shown in Figure 7-1, Figure 7-2, Figure 7-3, and Figure 7-4. The 100-ball GGM and ZGM ball

grid array (BGA) terminal assignments are shown in Figure 7-5. Table 7-1 describes the function(s) of each pin.

TDO 76

50

49

GPIO16/SPISIMOA/CANTXB/TZ5

V_SS

77

78

79

48 GPIO3/EPWM2B/SPISOMID

47 GPIO0/EPWM1A

XRS

GPIO27/ECAP4/EQEP2S/SPISTEB

V_DDIO

EMU0 80

EMU1 81

46

45 GPIO2/EPWM2A

44 GPIO1/EPWM1B/SPISIMOD

43 GPIO34

V_DDIO

82

83

84

85

GPIO24/ECAP1/EQEP2A/SPISIMOB

V_DD

42

41

40

39

TRST

V_DD

V_SS

V_DD2A18

V_SS2AGND

X2 86

V_SS

87

X1 88

38 ADCRESEXT

37 ADCREFP

36 ADCREFM

35 ADCREFIN

34 ADCINB7

33 ADCINB6

32 ADCINB5

31 ADCINB4

30 ADCINB3

29 ADCINB2

28 ADCINB1

27 ADCINB0

V_SS

89

XCLKIN 90

GPIO25/ECAP2/EQEP2B/SPISOMIB

91

92

93

94

95

96

GPIO28/SCIRXDA/TZ5

V_DD

V_SS

GPIO13/TZ2/CANRXB/SPISOMIB

V_DD3VFL

TEST1 97

TEST2 98

GPIO26/ECAP3/EQEP2I/SPICLKB

GPIO32/SDAA/EPWMSYNCI/ADCSOCAO

99

V_DDAIO

100

26

Figure 7-1. TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808-Q1 100-Pin PZ LQFP (Top View)

Submit Document Feedback

9

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

TDO 76

50

49

GPIO16/SPISIMOA/TZ5

V_SS

77

78

79

48 GPIO3/EPWM2B/SPISOMID

47 GPIO0/EPWM1A

XRS

GPIO27/ECAP4/EQEP2S/SPISTEB

V_DDIO

EMU0 80

EMU1 81

46

45 GPIO2/EPWM2A

44 GPIO1/EPWM1B/SPISIMOD

43 GPIO34

V_DDIO

82

83

84

85

GPIO24/ECAP1/EQEP2A/SPISIMOB

V_DD

42

41

40

39

TRST

V_DD

V_SS

V_DD2A18

V_SS2AGND

X2 86

V_SS

87

X1 88

38 ADCRESEXT

37 ADCREFP

36 ADCREFM

35 ADCREFIN

34 ADCINB7

33 ADCINB6

32 ADCINB5

31 ADCINB4

30 ADCINB3

29 ADCINB2

28 ADCINB1

27 ADCINB0

V_SS

89

XCLKIN 90

GPIO25/ECAP2/EQEP2B/SPISOMIB

91

92

93

94

95

96

GPIO28/SCIRXDA/TZ5

V_DD

V_SS

GPIO13/TZ2/SPISOMIB

V_DD3VFL

TEST1 97

TEST2 98

GPIO26/ECAP3/EQEP2I/SPICLKB

GPIO32/SDAA/EPWMSYNCI/ADCSOCAO

99

V_DDAIO

100

26

Figure 7-2. TMS320F2806 100-Pin PZ LQFP (Top View)

10

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

TDO 76

50

49

GPIO16/SPISIMOA/TZ5

V_SS

77

78

79

48 GPIO3/EPWM2B

47 GPIO0/EPWM1A

XRS

SPISTEB/GPIO27

V_DDIO

EMU0 80

EMU1 81

46

45 GPIO2/EPWM2A

44 GPIO1/EPWM1B

43 GPIO34

V_DDIO

82

83

84

85

SPISIMOB/GPIO24/ECAP1

V_DD

42

41

40

39

TRST

V_DD

V_SS

V_DD2A18

V_SS2AGND

X2 86

V_SS

87

X1 88

38 ADCRESEXT

37 ADCREFP

36 ADCREFM

35 ADCREFIN

34 ADCINB7

33 ADCINB6

32 ADCINB5

31 ADCINB4

30 ADCINB3

29 ADCINB2

28 ADCINB1

27 ADCINB0

V_SS

89

XCLKIN 90

GPIO25/ECAP2/SPISOMIB

91

92

93

94

95

96

GPIO28/SCIRXDA/TZ5

V_DD

V_SS

SPISOMIB/GPIO13/TZ2

(A)

V_DD3VFL

TEST1 97

TEST2 98

SPICLKB/GPIO26

GPIO32/SDAA/EPWMSYNCI/ADCSOCAO

99

V_DDAIO

100

26

A. On the C280x devices, the V_DD3VFLpin is V_DDIO

.

Figure 7-3. TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802, TMS320C2801 100-Pin PZ LQFP (Top View)

Submit Document Feedback

11

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

TDO 76

50

49

GPIO16/SPISIMOA/TZ5

V_SS

77

78

79

48 GPIO3/EPWM2B

47 GPIO0/EPWM1A

XRS

GPIO27

V_DDIO

EMU0 80

EMU1 81

46

45 GPIO2/EPWM2A

44 GPIO1/EPWM1B

43 GPIO34

V_DDIO

82

83

84

85

GPIO24/ECAP1

V_DD

42

41

40

39

TRST

V_DD

V_SS

V_DD2A18

V_SS2AGND

X2 86

V_SS

87

X1 88

38 ADCRESEXT

37 ADCREFP

36 ADCREFM

35 ADCREFIN

34 ADCINB7

33 ADCINB6

32 ADCINB5

31 ADCINB4

30 ADCINB3

29 ADCINB2

28 ADCINB1

27 ADCINB0

V_SS

89

XCLKIN 90

GPIO25/ECAP2

91

92

93

94

95

96

GPIO28/SCIRXDA/TZ5

V_DD

V_SS

GPIO13/TZ2

V_DD3VFL

TEST1 97

TEST2 98

GPIO26 99

V_DDAIO

100

26

GPIO32/SDAA/EPWMSYNCI/ADCSOCAO

A. CANTXA (pin 7) and CANRXA (pin 6) pins are not applicable for the TMS320F28015.

Figure 7-4. TMS320F2801x 100-Pin PZ LQFP (Top View)

12

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

V_SSAIO

V_SS2AGND

V_DD2A18

V_SS

ADCINB0

ADCINB3

ADCINB1

ADCINB2

ADCINA2

ADCINB5

ADCINB4

ADCINB6

ADCINA5

ADCINB7

ADCREFIN

ADCREFM

ADCREFP

GPIO1

GPIO0

GPIO3

GPIO16

K

J

V_DDAIO

ADCLO

GPIO2

GPIO4

GPIO5

GPIO6

GPIO17

V_DDIO

V_SS

ADCINA1

ADCINA0

ADCINA3

V_DDA2

GPIO18

H

G

F

V_DD

ADCINA4

GPIO34

GPIO7

GPIO19

V_SSA2

V_SS

V_DD

ADCINA7

ADCINA6

ADCRESEXT

GPIO20

GPIO9

GPIO8

V_DD

V_SS

V_DD1A18

V_SS1AGND

V_DDIO

GPIO15

GPIO31

X1

GPIO21

XCLKOUT

GPIO22

GPIO27

XRS

GPIO10

E

D

C

B

A

V_DD

V_SS

V_DD

V_SS

GPIO30

GPIO14

GPIO29

TEST2

TEST1

GPIO28

GPIO11

V_DDIO

V_DD3VFL

GPIO33

GPIO25

XCLKIN

V_SS

X2

GPIO24

EMU1

V_DDIO

TDI

TDO

V_SS

GPIO23

V_SS

V_DD

GPIO12

GPIO26

GPIO13

TMS

V_SS

GPIO32

EMU0

TCK

TRST

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Bottom View

Figure 7-5. TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806,TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320F28016,

TMS320F28015, TMS320C2802, TMS320C2801 100-Ball GGM and ZGM MicroStar BGA™ (Bottom View)

Submit Document Feedback

13

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

7.2 Signal Descriptions

Table 7-1 describes the signals. All digital inputs are TTL-compatible. All outputs are 3.3 V with CMOS levels.

Inputs are not 5-V tolerant.

Table 7-1. Signal Descriptions

PIN NO.

DESCRIPTION ⁽¹⁾

GGM/

ZGM

BALL #

NAME

PZ

PIN #

JTAG

JTAG test reset with internal pulldown. TRST, when driven high, gives the scan system control of the

operations of the device. If this signal is not connected or driven low, the device operates in its

functional mode, and the test reset signals are ignored.

NOTE: Do not use pullup resistors on TRST; it has an internal pull-down device. TRST is an active

high test pin and must be maintained low at all times during normal device operation. An external

pulldown resistor is required on this pin. The value of this resistor should be based on drive strength

of the debugger pods applicable to the design. A 2.2-kΩ resistor generally offers adequate

protection. Since this is application-specific, it is recommended that each target board be validated

for proper operation of the debugger and the application. (I, ↓)

TRST

84

A6

TCK

TMS

75

74

A10

B10

JTAG test clock with internal pullup (I, ↑)

JTAG test-mode select (TMS) with internal pullup. This serial control input is clocked into the TAP

controller on the rising edge of TCK. (I, ↑)

JTAG test data input (TDI) with internal pullup. TDI is clocked into the selected register (instruction

or data) on a rising edge of TCK. (I, ↑)

TDI

73

76

C9

B9

JTAG scan out, test data output (TDO). The contents of the selected register (instruction or data) are

shifted out of TDO on the falling edge of TCK. (O/Z 8 mA drive)

TDO

Emulator pin 0. When TRST is driven high, this pin is used as an interrupt to or from the emulator

system and is defined as input/output through the JTAG scan. This pin is also used to put the device

into boundary-scan mode. With the EMU0 pin at a logic-high state and the EMU1 pin at a logic-low

state, a rising edge on the TRST pin would latch the device into boundary-scan mode. (I/O/Z, 8 mA

drive ↑)

EMU0

80

A8

NOTE: An external pullup resistor is recommended on this pin. The value of this resistor should be

based on the drive strength of the debugger pods applicable to the design. A 2.2-kΩ to 4.7-kΩ

resistor is generally adequate. Since this is application-specific, it is recommended that each target

board be validated for proper operation of the debugger and the application.

Emulator pin 1. When TRST is driven high, this pin is used as an interrupt to or from the emulator

system and is defined as input/output through the JTAG scan. This pin is also used to put the device

into boundary-scan mode. With the EMU0 pin at a logic-high state and the EMU1 pin at a logic-low

state, a rising edge on the TRST pin would latch the device into boundary-scan mode. (I/O/Z, 8 mA

drive ↑)

NOTE: An external pullup resistor is recommended on this pin. The value of this resistor should be

based on the drive strength of the debugger pods applicable to the design. A 2.2-kΩ to 4.7-kΩ

resistor is generally adequate. Since this is application-specific, it is recommended that each target

board be validated for proper operation of the debugger and the application.

EMU1

81

96

B7

C4

FLASH

3.3-V Flash Core Power Pin. This pin should be connected to 3.3 V at all times. On the ROM

V_DD3VFL

parts (C280x), this pin should be connected to V_DDIO

.

TEST1

TEST2

97

98

A3

B3

Test Pin. Reserved for TI. Must be left unconnected. (I/O)

CLOCK

Output clock derived from SYSCLKOUT. XCLKOUT is either the same frequency, one-half the

frequency, or one-fourth the frequency of SYSCLKOUT. This is controlled by the bits 1, 0

(XCLKOUTDIV) in the XCLK register. At reset, XCLKOUT = SYSCLKOUT/4. The XCLKOUT signal

can be turned off by setting XCLKOUTDIV to 3. Unlike other GPIO pins, the XCLKOUT pin is not

placed in high-impedance state during a reset. (O/Z, 8 mA drive).

XCLKOUT

XCLKIN

66

90

E8

B5

External Oscillator Input. This pin is used to feed a clock from an external 3.3-V oscillator. In this

case, tie the X1 pin to GND. Alternately, when a crystal/resonator is used (or if an external 1.8-V

oscillator is fed into the X1 pin), tie the XCLKIN pin to GND. (I)

14

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

www.ti.com

NAME

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

Table 7-1. Signal Descriptions (continued)

PIN NO.

DESCRIPTION ⁽¹⁾

GGM/

ZGM

PZ

PIN #

BALL #

Internal/External Oscillator Input. To use the internal oscillator, a quartz crystal or a ceramic

resonator may be connected across X1 and X2. The X1 pin is referenced to the 1.8-V core digital

power supply. A 1.8-V external oscillator may be connected to the X1 pin. In this case, the XCLKIN

pin must be connected to ground. If a 3.3-V external oscillator is used with the XCLKIN pin, X1 must

be tied to GND. (I)

X1

X2

88

86

E6

C6

Internal Oscillator Output. A quartz crystal or a ceramic resonator may be connected across X1 and

X2. If X2 is not used it must be left unconnected. (O)

RESET

Device Reset (in) and Watchdog Reset (out).

Device reset. XRS causes the device to terminate execution. The PC will point to the address

contained at the location 0x3FFFC0. When XRS is brought to a high level, execution begins at the

location pointed to by the PC. This pin is driven low by the DSP when a watchdog reset occurs.

During watchdog reset, the XRS pin is driven low for the watchdog reset duration of 512 OSCCLK

cycles. (I/OD, ↑)

XRS

78

B8

The output buffer of this pin is an open-drain with an internal pullup. If this pin is driven by an

external device, it should be done using an open-drain device.

ADC SIGNALS

ADC Group A, Channel 7 input (I)

ADC Group A, Channel 6 input (I)

ADC Group A, Channel 5 input (I)

ADC Group A, Channel 4 input (I)

ADC Group A, Channel 3 input (I)

ADC Group A, Channel 2 input (I)

ADC Group A, Channel 1 input (I)

ADC Group A, Channel 0 input (I)

ADC Group B, Channel 7 input (I)

ADC Group B, Channel 6 input (I)

ADC Group B, Channel 5 input (I)

ADC Group B, Channel 4 input (I)

ADC Group B, Channel 3 input (I)

ADC Group B, Channel 2 input (I)

ADC Group B, Channel 1 input (I)

ADC Group B, Channel 0 input (I)

Low Reference (connect to analog ground) (I)

ADC External Current Bias Resistor. Connect a 22-kΩ resistor to analog ground.

External reference input (I)

ADCINA7

ADCINA6

ADCINA5

ADCINA4

ADCINA3

ADCINA2

ADCINA1

ADCINA0

ADCINB7

ADCINB6

ADCINB5

ADCINB4

ADCINB3

ADCINB2

ADCINB1

ADCINB0

ADCLO

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

24

38

35

F3

F4

G4

G1

G2

G3

H1

H2

K5

H4

K4

J4

K3

H3

J3

K2

J1

ADCRESEXT

ADCREFIN

F5

J5

Internal Reference Positive Output. Requires a low ESR (under 1.5 Ω) ceramic bypass capacitor of

2.2 μF to analog ground. (O)

NOTE: Use the ADC Clock rate to derive the ESR specification from the capacitor data sheet that is

used in the system.

ADCREFP

ADCREFM

37

36

G5

H5

Internal Reference Medium Output. Requires a low ESR (under 1.5 Ω) ceramic bypass capacitor of

2.2 μF to analog ground. (O)

NOTE: Use the ADC Clock rate to derive the ESR specification from the capacitor data sheet that is

used in the system.

Submit Document Feedback

15

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Table 7-1. Signal Descriptions (continued)

PIN NO.

DESCRIPTION ⁽¹⁾

GGM/

ZGM

BALL #

NAME

PZ

PIN #

CPU AND I/O POWER PINS

ADC Analog Power Pin (3.3 V)

V_DDA2

V_SSA2

15

14

26

25

12

13

40

39

10

42

59

68

85

93

3

F2

F1

ADC Analog Ground Pin

V_DDAIO

V_SSAIO

V_DD1A18

V_SS1AGND

V_DD2A18

V_SS2AGND

V_DD

J2

ADC Analog I/O Power Pin (3.3 V)

ADC Analog I/O Ground Pin

ADC Analog Power Pin (1.8 V)

ADC Analog Ground Pin

K1

E4

E5

J6

ADC Analog Power Pin (1.8 V)

ADC Analog Ground Pin

K6

E2

G6

F10

D7

B6

D4

C2

H7

E9

A7

B1

E3

H6

K9

H10

F7

V_DD

CPU and Logic Digital Power Pins (1.8 V)

V_DD

V_DDIO

V_SS

46

65

82

2

Digital I/O Power Pin (3.3 V)

V_SS

11

41

49

55

62

69

77

87

89

94

V_SS

Digital Ground Pins

V_SS

D10

A9

D6

A5

A4

V_SS

GPIOA AND PERIPHERAL SIGNALS ^{(2) (3)}

GPIO0

General-purpose input/output 0 (I/O/Z) ⁽⁴⁾

EPWM1A

-

Enhanced PWM1 Output A and HRPWM channel (O)

-

47

44

45

K8

K7

J7

GPIO1

EPWM1B

SPISIMOD

-

General-purpose input/output 1 (I/O/Z)⁽⁴⁾

Enhanced PWM1 Output B (O)

SPI-D slave in, master out (I/O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

-

GPIO2

EPWM2A

-

General-purpose input/output 2 (I/O/Z)⁽⁴⁾

Enhanced PWM2 Output A and HRPWM channel (O)

-

16

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

www.ti.com

NAME

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

Table 7-1. Signal Descriptions (continued)

PIN NO.

DESCRIPTION ⁽¹⁾

GGM/

ZGM

PZ

PIN #

BALL #

GPIO3

EPWM2B

SPISOMID

-

General-purpose input/output 3 (I/O/Z)⁽⁴⁾

Enhanced PWM2 Output B (O)

SPI-D slave out, master in (I/O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

-

48

51

53

56

58

60

61

64

70

1

J8

J9

GPIO4

EPWM3A

-

General-purpose input/output 4 (I/O/Z)⁽⁴⁾

Enhanced PWM3 output A and HRPWM channel (O)

-

GPIO5

General-purpose input/output 5 (I/O/Z)⁽⁴⁾

Enhanced PWM3 output B (O)

SPI-D clock (I/O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

Enhanced capture input/output 1 (I/O)

EPWM3B

SPICLKD

ECAP1

H9

G9

G8

F9

GPIO6

EPWM4A

EPWMSYNCI

EPWMSYNCO

General-purpose input/output 6 (I/O/Z)⁽⁴⁾

Enhanced PWM4 output A and HRPWM channel (O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

External ePWM sync pulse input (I)

External ePWM sync pulse output (O)

GPIO7

General-purpose input/output 7 (I/O/Z)⁽⁴⁾

Enhanced PWM4 output B (O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

SPI-D slave transmit enable (I/O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

Enhanced capture input/output 2 (I/O)

EPWM4B

SPISTED

ECAP2

GPIO8

General-purpose input/output 8 (I/O/Z)⁽⁴⁾

Enhanced PWM5 output A and HRPWM channel (O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

Enhanced CAN-B transmit (O) (not available on 2801, 2802, F2806)

ADC start-of-conversion A (O)

EPWM5A

CANTXB

ADCSOCAO

GPIO9

General-purpose input/output 9 (I/O/Z)⁽⁴⁾

Enhanced PWM5 output B (O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

SCI-B transmit data (O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

Enhanced capture input/output 3 (I/O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

EPWM5B

SCITXDB

ECAP3

F8

GPIO10

General-purpose input/output 10 (I/O/Z)⁽⁴⁾

Enhanced PWM6 output A and HRPWM channel (O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

Enhanced CAN-B receive (I) (not available on 2801, 2802, F2806)

ADC start-of-conversion B (O)

EPWM6A

CANRXB

ADCSOCBO

E10

D9

B2

B4

D3

E1

K10

GPIO11

General-purpose input/output 11 (I/O/Z)⁽⁴⁾

Enhanced PWM6 output B (O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

SCI-B receive data (I) (not available on 2801, 2802)

Enhanced CAP Input/Output 4 (I/O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

EPWM6B

SCIRXDB

ECAP4

GPIO12

TZ1

CANTXB

SPISIMOB

General-purpose input/output 12 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

Trip Zone input 1 (I)

Enhanced CAN-B transmit (O) (not available on 2801, 2802, F2806)

SPI-B Slave in, Master out (I/O)

GPIO13

TZ2

CANRXB

SPISOMIB

General-purpose input/output 13 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

Trip zone input 2 (I)

Enhanced CAN-B receive (I) (not available on 2801, 2802, F2806)

SPI-B slave out, master in (I/O)

95

8

GPIO14

TZ3

SCITXDB

SPICLKB

General-purpose input/output 14 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

Trip zone input 3 (I)

SCI-B transmit (O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

SPI-B clock input/output (I/O)

GPIO15

TZ4

SCIRXDB

SPISTEB

General-purpose input/output 15 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

Trip zone input 4 (I)

SCI-B receive (I) (not available on 2801, 2802)

SPI-B slave transmit enable (I/O)

9

GPIO16

SPISIMOA

CANTXB

TZ5

General-purpose input/output 16 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

SPI-A slave in, master out (I/O)

Enhanced CAN-B transmit (O) (not available on 2801, 2802, F2806)

Trip zone input 5 (I)

50

Submit Document Feedback

17

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Table 7-1. Signal Descriptions (continued)

PIN NO.

DESCRIPTION ⁽¹⁾

GGM/

ZGM

BALL #

NAME

PZ

PIN #

GPIO17

General-purpose input/output 17 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

SPI-A slave out, master in (I/O)

Enhanced CAN-B receive (I) (not available on 2801, 2802, F2806)

Trip zone input 6 (I)

SPISOMIA

CANRXB

TZ6

52

54

J10

H8

GPIO18

SPICLKA

SCITXDB

General-purpose input/output 18 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

SPI-A clock input/output (I/O)

SCI-B transmit (O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

-

GPIO19

General-purpose input/output 19 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

SPISTEA

SPI-A slave transmit enable input/output (I/O)

SCIRXDB

57

G10

SCI-B receive (I) (not available on 2801, 2802)

-

GPIO20

General-purpose input/output 20 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

EQEP1A

SPISIMOC

CANTXB

Enhanced QEP1 input A (I)

SPI-C slave in, master out (I/O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

Enhanced CAN-B transmit (O) (not available on 2801, 2802, F2806)

63

67

71

72

83

91

99

79

92

4

F6

E7

D8

C10

C7

C5

A2

C8

D5

C3

GPIO21

General-purpose input/output 21 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

Enhanced QEP1 input A (I)

SPI-C master in, slave out (I/O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

Enhanced CAN-B receive (I) (not available on 2801, 2802, F2806)

EQEP1B

SPISOMIC

CANRXB

GPIO22

General-purpose input/output 22 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

Enhanced QEP1 strobe (I/O)

SPI-C clock (I/O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

SCI-B transmit (O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

EQEP1S

SPICLKC

SCITXDB

GPIO23

EQEP1I

SPISTEC

SCIRXDB

General-purpose input/output 23 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

Enhanced QEP1 index (I/O)

SPI-C slave transmit enable (I/O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

SCI-B receive (I) (not available on 2801, 2802)

GPIO24

ECAP1

EQEP2A

SPISIMOB

General-purpose input/output 24 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

Enhanced capture 1 (I/O)

Enhanced QEP2 input A (I) (not available on 2801, 2802)

SPI-B slave in, master out (I/O)

GPIO25

ECAP2

EQEP2B

SPISOMIB

General-purpose input/output 25 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

Enhanced capture 2 (I/O)

Enhanced QEP2 input B (I) (not available on 2801, 2802)

SPI-B master in, slave out (I/O)

GPIO26

ECAP3

EQEP2I

SPICLKB

General-purpose input/output 26 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

Enhanced capture 3 (I/O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

Enhanced QEP2 index (I/O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

SPI-B clock (I/O)

GPIO27

ECAP4

EQEP2S

SPISTEB

General-purpose input/output 27 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

Enhanced capture 4 (I/O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

Enhanced QEP2 strobe (I/O) (not available on 2801, 2802)

SPI-B slave transmit enable (I/O)

GPIO28

SCIRXDA

-

General-purpose input/output 28. This pin has an 8-mA (typical) output buffer. (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

SCI receive data (I)

-

TZ5

Trip zone input 5 (I)

GPIO29

SCITXDA

-

General-purpose input/output 29. This pin has an 8-mA (typical) output buffer. (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

SCI transmit data (O)

-

TZ6

Trip zone 6 input (I)

18

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

www.ti.com

NAME

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

Table 7-1. Signal Descriptions (continued)

PIN NO.

DESCRIPTION ⁽¹⁾

GGM/

ZGM

PZ

PIN #

BALL #

GPIO30

General-purpose input/output 30. This pin has an 8-mA (typical) output buffer. (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

CANRXA

-

Enhanced CAN-A receive data (I)

-

6

7

D2

D1

A1

C1

G7

GPIO31

CANTXA

-

General-purpose input/output 31. This pin has an 8-mA (typical) output buffer. (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

Enhanced CAN-A transmit data (O)

-

GPIO32

SDAA

EPWMSYNCI

ADCSOCAO

General-purpose input/output 32 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

I2C data open-drain bidirectional port (I/OD)

Enhanced PWM external sync pulse input (I)

ADC start-of-conversion (O)

100

5

GPIO33

SCLA

EPWMSYNCO

ADCSOCBO

General-Purpose Input/Output 33 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

I2C clock open-drain bidirectional port (I/OD)

Enhanced PWM external synch pulse output (O)

ADC start-of-conversion (O)

GPIO34

General-Purpose Input/Output 34 (I/O/Z)⁽⁵⁾

-

43

(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, OD = Open drain, ↑ = Pullup, ↓ = Pulldown

(2) Some peripheral functions may not be available in TMS320F2801x devices. See Table 6-2 for details.

(3) All GPIO pins are I/O/Z, 4-mA drive typical (unless otherwise indicated), and have an internal pullup, which can be selectively enabled/

disabled on a per-pin basis. This feature only applies to the GPIO pins. The GPIO function (shown in Italics) is the default at reset. The

peripheral signals that are listed under them are alternate functions.

(4) The pullups on GPIO0-GPIO11 pins are not enabled at reset.

(5) The pullups on GPIO12-GPIO34 are enabled upon reset.

Note

Some peripheral functions may not be available in TMS320F2801x devices. See Table 6-2 for details.

Submit Document Feedback

19

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8 Specifications

This section provides the absolute maximum ratings and the recommended operating conditions.

8.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings

Unless otherwise noted, the list of absolute maximum ratings are specified over operating temperature ranges. ^{(1) (2)}

MIN

–0.3

MAX

UNIT

V_DDIO, V_DD3VFLwith respect to V_SS

V_DDA2, V_DDAIOwith respect to V_SSA

V_DDwith respect to V_SS

4.6

2.5

Supply voltage

V

V_DD1A18, V_DD2A18with respect to V_SSA

2.5

V_SSA2, V_SSAIO, V_SS1AGND, V_SS2AGNDwith respect

to V_SS

–0.3

0.3

Input voltage

V_IN

–0.3

–20

–40

–65

4.6

20

V

Output voltage

V_O

(3)

Input clamp current

Output clamp current

I_IK(V_IN< 0 or V_IN> V_DDIO

)

mA

I_OK(V_O< 0 or V_O> V_DDIO

)

20

A version (GGM, ZGM, PZ)⁽⁴⁾

S version (GGM, ZGM, PZ)⁽⁴⁾

Q version (PZ)⁽⁴⁾

85

Operating ambient temperature, T_A

125

150

°C

(4)

Junction temperature

Storage temperature

T_J

°C

(4)

T_stg

(1) Stresses beyond those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings

only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under Section 8.4 is not implied.

Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.

(2) All voltage values are with respect to V_SS, unless otherwise noted.

(3) Continuous clamp current per pin is ±2 mA. This includes the analog inputs which have an internal clamping circuit that clamps the

voltage to a diode drop above V_DDA2or below V_SSA2

.

(4) Long-term high-temperature storage and/or extended use at maximum temperature conditions may result in a reduction of overall

device life. For additional information, see Semiconductor and IC package thermal metrics.

20

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.2 ESD Ratings – Automotive

VALUE

UNIT

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802, TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, and

TMS320F28015 in 100-pin PZ package

Human body model (HBM), per AEC-Q100-002⁽¹⁾

±2000

±500

±750

Charged device model (CDM),

per AEC-Q100-011

All pins

V_(ESD)

Electrostatic discharge

V

Corner pins on 100-pin PZ:

1, 25, 26, 50, 51, 75, 76, 100

(1) AEC-Q100-002 indicates HBM stressing is done in accordance with the ANSI/ESDA/JEDEC JS-001 specification.

8.3 ESD Ratings – Commercial

VALUE

UNIT

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802, TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, and

TMS320F28015 in 100-ball ZGM package

Human-body model (HBM), per ANSI/ESDA/JEDEC JS-001⁽¹⁾

±2000

±500

V_(ESD)

Electrostatic discharge

V

Charged-device model (CDM), per JEDEC specification JESD22-

C101⁽²⁾

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802, TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, and

TMS320F28015 in 100-ball GGM package

Human-body model (HBM), per ANSI/ESDA/JEDEC JS-001⁽¹⁾

±2000

±500

V_(ESD)

Electrostatic discharge

V

Charged-device model (CDM), per JEDEC specification JESD22-

C101⁽²⁾

(1) JEDEC document JEP155 states that 500-V HBM allows safe manufacturing with a standard ESD control process.

(2) JEDEC document JEP157 states that 250-V CDM allows safe manufacturing with a standard ESD control process.

8.4 Recommended Operating Conditions

over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)

MIN

3.14

1.71

NOM

3.3

1.8

0

MAX

3.47

1.89

UNIT

V

Device supply voltage, I/O, V_DDIO

Device supply voltage CPU, V_DD

Supply ground, V_SS, V_SSIO

V

ADC supply voltage (3.3 V), V_DDA2, V_DDAIO

ADC supply voltage (1.8 V), V_DD1A18, V_DD2A18

Flash supply voltage, V_DD3VFL

3.14

3.3

1.8

3.3

3.47

V

1.71

1.89

V

3.14

3.47

V

Device clock frequency (system clock),

f_SYSCLKOUT

100-MHz devices

60-MHz devices

All inputs except X1

X1

2

100

MHz

V

2

60

High-level input voltage, V_IH

V_DDIO+ 0.3

0.7 * V_DD– 0.05

V_SS– 0.3

V_DD

Low-level input voltage, V_IL

All inputs except X1

X1

0.8

V

0.3 * V_DD+ 0.05

All I/Os except Group 2

Group 2⁽¹⁾

–4

–8

4

mA

High-level output source current,

V_OH= 2.4 V, I_OH

All I/Os except Group 2

Group 2⁽¹⁾

Low-level output sink current,

V_OL= V_OLMAX, I_OL

8

Submit Document Feedback

21

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)

MIN

–40

NOM

MAX

85

UNIT

A version

S version

°C

125

Ambient temperature, T_A

Q version

(AEC-Q100

Qualification)

(1) Group 2 pins are as follows: GPIO28, GPIO29, GPIO30, GPIO31, TDO, XCLKOUT, EMU0, and EMU1

22

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.5 Power Consumption Summary

8.5.1 TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808 Current Consumption by Power-Supply Pins at 100-MHz SYSCLKOUT

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

I_DD

I_DDIO

TYP⁽⁵⁾

I_DD3VFL

TYP

I_DDA18

TYP⁽⁵⁾

I_DDA33

TYP⁽⁵⁾

MODE

TEST CONDITIONS

TYP⁽⁵⁾

MAX⁽⁶⁾

The following peripheral

clocks are enabled:

•

ePWM1/2/3/4/5/6

eCAP1/2/3/4

eQEP1/2

eCAN-A

SCI-A/B

SPI-A

ADC

I2C

Operational

(Flash)

195 mA

230 mA

15 mA

27 mA

35 mA

40 mA

30 mA

38 mA

1.5 mA

2 mA

All PWM pins are toggled

at 100 kHz.

All I/O pins are left

unconnected.

Data is continuously

transmitted out of the

SCI-A, SCI-B, and

eCAN-A ports. The

hardware multiplier is

exercised.

Code is running out of

flash with 3 wait-states.

XCLKOUT is turned off.

Flash is powered down.

XCLKOUT is turned off.

The following peripheral

clocks are enabled:

IDLE

75 mA

90 mA

12 mA

500 μA

2 mA

2 μA

10 μA

5 μA

50 μA

15 μA

30 μA

•

eCAN-A

SCI-A

SPI-A

I2C

Flash is powered down.

Peripheral clocks are off.

STANDBY

HALT

6 mA

100 μA

60 μA

500 μA

120 μA

2 μA

10 μA

5 μA

50 μA

15 μA

30 μA

Flash is powered down.

Peripheral clocks are off.

Input clock is disabled.

70 μA

(1) I_DDIOcurrent is dependent on the electrical loading on the I/O pins.

(2) The I_DD3VFLcurrent indicated in this table is the flash read-current and does not include additional current for erase/write operations.

During flash programming, extra current is drawn from the V_DDand V_DD3VFLrails, as indicated in Section 8.14.6.3. If the user

application involves on-board flash programming, this extra current must be taken into account while architecting the power-supply

stage.

(3) I_DDA18includes current into V_DD1A18and V_DD2A18pins. In order to realize the I_DDA18currents shown for IDLE, STANDBY, and HALT,

clock to the ADC module must be turned off explicitly by writing to the PCLKCR0 register.

(4) I_DDA33includes current into V_DDA2and V_DDAIOpins.

(5) TYP numbers are applicable over room temperature and nominal voltage.

(6) MAX numbers are at 125°C and MAX voltage.

Note

The peripheral - I/O multiplexing implemented in the 280x devices prevents all available peripherals

from being used at the same time. This is because more than one peripheral function may share an

I/O pin. It is, however, possible to turn on the clocks to all the peripherals at the same time, although

such a configuration is not useful. If this is done, the current drawn by the device will be more than the

numbers specified in the current consumption tables.

Submit Document Feedback

23

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.5.2 TMS320F2806 Current Consumption by Power-Supply Pins at 100-MHz SYSCLKOUT

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

I_DD

I_DDIO

TYP⁽⁵⁾

I_DD3VFL

I_DDA18

TYP⁽⁵⁾

I_DDA33

MODE

TEST CONDITIONS

TYP⁽⁵⁾

MAX⁽⁶⁾

TYP⁽⁵⁾

MAX⁽⁶⁾

TYP⁽⁵⁾

MAX⁽⁶⁾

The following peripheral

clocks are enabled:

•

ePWM1/2/3/4/5/6

eCAP1/2/3/4

eQEP1/2

eCAN-A

SCI-A/B

SPI-A

ADC

I2C

Operational

(Flash)

195 mA 230 mA 15 mA

27 mA

35 mA

40 mA

30 mA

38 mA

1.5 mA

2 mA

All PWM pins are toggled at

100 kHz.

All I/O pins are left

unconnected.

Data is continuously

transmitted out of the SCI-A,

SCI-B, and eCAN-A ports.

The hardware multiplier is

exercised.

Code is running out of flash

with 3 wait-states.

XCLKOUT is turned off

Flash is powered down.

XCLKOUT is turned off.

The following peripheral

clocks are enabled:

IDLE

75 mA

90 mA

12 mA

500 μA

2 mA

2 μA

10 μA

5 μA

50 μA

15 μA

30 μA

•

eCAN-A

SCI-A

SPI-A

I2C

Flash is powered down.

Peripheral clocks are off.

STANDBY

HALT

6 mA

100 μA

60 μA

500 μA

120 μA

2 μA

10 μA

5 μA

50 μA

15 μA

30 μA

Flash is powered down.

Peripheral clocks are off.

Input clock is disabled.

70 μA

(1) I_DDIOcurrent is dependent on the electrical loading on the I/O pins.

(2) The I_DD3VFLcurrent indicated in this table is the flash read-current and does not include additional current for erase/write operations.

During flash programming, extra current is drawn from the V_DDand V_DD3VFLrails, as indicated in Section 8.14.6.3. If the user

application involves on-board flash programming, this extra current must be taken into account while architecting the power-supply

stage.

(3) I_DDA18includes current into V_DD1A18and V_DD2A18pins. In order to realize the I_DDA18currents shown for IDLE, STANDBY, and HALT,

clock to the ADC module must be turned off explicitly by writing to the PCLKCR0 register.

(4) I_DDA33includes current into V_DDA2and V_DDAIOpins.

(5) TYP numbers are applicable over room temperature and nominal voltage.

(6) MAX numbers are at 125°C and MAX voltage.

Note

The peripheral - I/O multiplexing implemented in the 280x devices prevents all available peripherals

from being used at the same time. This is because more than one peripheral function may share an

I/O pin. It is, however, possible to turn on the clocks to all the peripherals at the same time, although

such a configuration is not useful. If this is done, the current drawn by the device will be more than the

numbers specified in the current consumption tables.

24

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.5.3 TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801 Current Consumption by Power-Supply Pins at 100-MHz SYSCLKOUT

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

I_DD

I_DDIO

TYP⁽⁵⁾

I_DD3VFL

TYP⁽⁵⁾

I_DDA18

TYP⁽⁵⁾

I_DDA33

TYP⁽⁵⁾

MODE

TEST CONDITIONS

TYP⁽⁵⁾

MAX⁽⁶⁾

The following peripheral

clocks are enabled:

•

ePWM1/2/3

eCAP1/2

eQEP1

eCAN-A

SCI-A

SPI-A

ADC

I2C

Operational

(Flash)

180 mA

210 mA

15 mA

27 mA

35 mA

40 mA

30 mA

38 mA

1.5 mA

2 mA

All PWM pins are toggled at

100 kHz.

All I/O pins are left

unconnected.

Data is continuously

transmitted out of the SCI-A,

SCI-B, and eCAN-A ports.

The hardware multiplier is

exercised.

Code is running out of flash

with 3 wait-states.

XCLKOUT is turned off.

Flash is powered down.

XCLKOUT is turned off.

The following peripheral

clocks are enabled:

IDLE

75 mA

90 mA

12 mA

500 μA

2 mA

2 μA

10 μA

5 μA

50 μA

15 μA

30 μA

•

eCAN-A

SCI-A

SPI-A

I2C

Flash is powered down.

Peripheral clocks are off.

STANDBY

HALT

6 mA

100 μA

60 μA

500 μA

120 μA

2 μA

10 μA

5 μA

50 μA

15 μA

30 μA

Flash is powered down.

Peripheral clocks are off.

Input clock is disabled.

70 μA

(1) I_DDIOcurrent is dependent on the electrical loading on the I/O pins.

(2) The I_DD3VFLcurrent indicated in this table is the flash read-current and does not include additional current for erase/write operations.

During flash programming, extra current is drawn from the V_DDand V_DD3VFLrails, as indicated in Section 8.14.6.3. If the user

application involves on-board flash programming, this extra current must be taken into account while architecting the power-supply

stage.

(3) I_DDA18includes current into V_DD1A18and V_DD2A18pins. In order to realize the I_DDA18currents shown for IDLE, STANDBY, and HALT,

clock to the ADC module must be turned off explicitly by writing to the PCLKCR0 register.

(4) I_DDA33includes current into V_DDA2and V_DDAIOpins.

(5) TYP numbers are applicable over room temperature and nominal voltage.

(6) MAX numbers are at 125°C and MAX voltage.

Note

The peripheral - I/O multiplexing implemented in the 280x devices prevents all available peripherals

from being used at the same time. This is because more than one peripheral function may share an

I/O pin. It is, however, possible to turn on the clocks to all the peripherals at the same time, although

such a configuration is not useful. If this is done, the current drawn by the device will be more than the

numbers specified in the current consumption tables.

Submit Document Feedback

25

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.5.4 TMS320C2802, TMS320C2801 Current Consumption by Power-Supply Pins at

100-MHz SYSCLKOUT

(1)

(2)

(3)

I_DD

I_DDIO

TYP⁽⁴⁾

I_DDA18

TYP⁽⁴⁾

I_DDA33

MODE

TEST CONDITIONS

TYP⁽⁴⁾

MAX⁽⁵⁾

TYP⁽⁴⁾

MAX⁽⁵⁾

The following peripheral clocks

are enabled:

•

ePWM1/2/3

eCAP1/2

eQEP1

eCAN-A

SCI-A

SPI-A

ADC

Operational

(ROM)

I2C

150 mA

165 mA

5 mA

10 mA

30 mA

38 mA

1.5 mA

2 mA

All PWM pins are toggled at

100 kHz.

All I/O pins are left unconnected.

Data is continuously transmitted

out of the SCI-A, SCI-B, and

eCAN-A ports. The hardware

multiplier is exercised.

Code is running out of ROM with

3 wait-states.

XCLKOUT is turned off.

The following peripheral clocks

are enabled:

•

eCAN-A

SCI-A

SPI-A

I2C

IDLE

75 mA

90 mA

12 mA

500 μA

2 mA

5 μA

50 μA

15 μA

30 μA

STANDBY

HALT

Peripheral clocks are off.

6 mA

100 μA

80 μA

500 μA

120 μA

5 μA

50 μA

15 μA

30 μA

Peripheral clocks are off.

Input clock is disabled.

70 μA

(1) I_DDIOcurrent is dependent on the electrical loading on the I/O pins.

(2) I_DDA18includes current into V_DD1A18and V_DD2A18pins. In order to realize the I_DDA18currents shown for IDLE, STANDBY, and HALT,

clock to the ADC module must be turned off explicitly by writing to the PCLKCR0 register.

(3) I_DDA33includes current into V_DDA2and V_DDAIOpins.

(4) TYP numbers are applicable over room temperature and nominal voltage.

(5) MAX numbers are at 125°C and MAX voltage.

Note

The peripheral - I/O multiplexing implemented in the 280x devices prevents all available peripherals

from being used at the same time. This is because more than one peripheral function may share an

I/O pin. It is, however, possible to turn on the clocks to all the peripherals at the same time, although

such a configuration is not useful. If this is done, the current drawn by the device will be more than the

numbers specified in the current consumption tables.

26

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.5.5 Reducing Current Consumption

280x devices have a richer peripheral mix compared to the 281x family. While the McBSP has been removed,

the following new peripherals have been added on the 280x:

•

3 SPI modules

1 CAN module

1 I2C module

The two event manager modules of the 281x have been enhanced and replaced with separate ePWM (6), eCAP

(4) and eQEP (2) modules, providing tremendous flexibility in applications. Like 281x, 280x DSPs incorporate a

unique method to reduce the device current consumption. Since each peripheral unit has an individual clock-

enable bit, significant reduction in current consumption can be achieved by turning off the clock to any peripheral

module that is not used in a given application. Furthermore, any one of the three low-power modes could be

taken advantage of to reduce the current consumption even further. Table 8-1 indicates the typical reduction in

current consumption achieved by turning off the clocks.

Table 8-1. Typical Current Consumption by Various

Peripherals (at 100 MHz)

PERIPHERAL

MODULE⁽¹⁾

I_DDCURRENT

REDUCTION (mA)⁽²⁾

ADC

I2C

8⁽³⁾

5

eQEP

ePWM

eCAP

SCI

5

2

4

SPI

5

eCAN

11

(1) All peripheral clocks are disabled upon reset. Writing to/reading

from peripheral registers is possible only after the peripheral

clocks are turned on.

(2) For peripherals with multiple instances, the current quoted is per

module. For example, the 5 mA number quoted for ePWM is for

one ePWM module.

(3) This number represents the current drawn by the digital portion

of the ADC module. Turning off the clock to the ADC module

results in the elimination of the current drawn by the analog

portion of the ADC (I_DDA18) as well.

Note

I_DDIOcurrent consumption is reduced by 15 mA (typical) when XCLKOUT is turned off.

Note

The baseline I_DDcurrent (current when the core is executing a dummy loop with no peripherals

enabled) is 110 mA, typical. To arrive at the I_DDcurrent for a given application, the current-drawn by

the peripherals (enabled by that application) must be added to the baseline I_DDcurrent.

Submit Document Feedback

27

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.5.6 Current Consumption Graphs

250.0

200.0

150.0

100.0

50.0

0.0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

SYSCLKOUT (MHz)

1.8-V current

IDD

IDDA18

IDDIO

IDD3VFL

3.3-V current

Figure 8-1. Typical Operational Current Versus Frequency (F2808)

600.0

500.0

400.0

300.0

200.0

100.0

0.0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

SYSCLKOUT (MHz)

TOTAL POWER

Figure 8-2. Typical Operational Power Versus Frequency (F2808)

Note

Typical operational current for 60-MHz devices can be estimated from Figure 8-1. For I_DDcurrent

alone, subtract the current contribution of non-existent peripherals after scaling the peripheral currents

for 60 MHz. For example, to compute the current of F2801-60 device, the contribution by the following

peripherals must be subtracted from I_DD: ePWM4/5/6, eCAP3/4, eQEP2, SCI-B.

28

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Current Vs SYSCLKOUT

200

180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

10

SYSCLKOUT (MHz)

IDD

IDDA18

1.8v current IDDIO

IDD3VFL

3.3v current

Figure 8-3. Typical Operational Current Versus Frequency (C280x)

Device Power Vs SYSCLKOUT

400.0

300.0

200.0

100.0

0.0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

SYSCLKOUT (MHz)

TOTAL POWER

Figure 8-4. Typical Operational Power Versus Frequency (C280x)

8.6 Electrical Characteristics

over recommended operating conditions (unless otherwise noted)

PARAMETER

TEST CONDITIONS

MIN

2.4

TYP

MAX UNIT

I_OH= I_OHMAX

I_OH= 50 μA

V_OHHigh-level output voltage

V

V_DDIO– 0.2

V_OL

Low-level output voltage

I_OL= I_OLMAX

0.4

V

Submit Document Feedback

29

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

www.ti.com

MAX UNIT

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

over recommended operating conditions (unless otherwise noted)

PARAMETER

TEST CONDITIONS

MIN

TYP

Pin with pullup

enabled

V_DDIO= 3.3 V, V_IN= 0 V All I/Os (including XRS)

–80

–140

–190

μA

Input current

(low level)

I_IL

Pin with pulldown

enabled

V_DDIO= 3.3 V, V_IN= 0 V

V_DDIO= 3.3 V, V_IN= V_DDIO

±2

Pin with pullup

enabled

±2

Input current Pin with pulldown

I_IH

V_DDIO= 3.3 V, V_IN= V_DDIO(F280x)

V_DDIO= 3.3 V, V_IN= V_DDIO(C280x)

V_O= V_DDIOor 0 V

28

80

50

80

190

±2

μA

(high level)

enabled

Pin with pulldown

enabled

140

Output current, pullup or pulldown

disabled

I_OZ

C_I

μA

pF

Input capacitance

2

30

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.7 Thermal Resistance Characteristics for F280x 100-Ball GGM Package

°C/W⁽¹⁾

12.08

AIR FLOW (lfm)⁽²⁾

RΘ_JC

RΘ_JB

Junction-to-case thermal resistance

Junction-to-board thermal resistance

N/A

0

16.46

30.58

29.31

28.09

26.62

0.4184

0.32

150

250

500

0

RΘ_JA

(High k PCB)

Junction-to-free air thermal resistance

Junction-to-package top

150

250

500

Psi_JT

0.3725

0.4887

(1) These values are based on a JEDEC defined 2S2P system (with the exception of the Theta JC [RΘ_JC] value, which is based on a

JEDEC defined 1S0P system) and will change based on environment as well as application. For more information, see these EIA/

JEDEC standards:

•

JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environmental Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air)

JESD51-3, Low Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages

JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages

JESD51-9, Test Boards for Area Array Surface Mount Package Thermal Measurements

(2) lfm = linear feet per minute

8.8 Thermal Resistance Characteristics for F280x 100-Pin PZ Package

°C/W⁽¹⁾

AIR FLOW (lfm)⁽²⁾

RΘ_JC

RΘ_JB

Junction-to-case thermal resistance

Junction-to-board thermal resistance

12.89

29.58

48.16

40.06

37.96

35.17

0.3425

0.85

N/A

0

150

250

500

0

RΘ_JA

(High k PCB)

Junction-to-free air thermal resistance

Junction-to-package top

150

250

500

Psi_JT

1.0575

1.410

(1) These values are based on a JEDEC defined 2S2P system (with the exception of the Theta JC [RΘ_JC] value, which is based on a

JEDEC defined 1S0P system) and will change based on environment as well as application. For more information, see these EIA/

JEDEC standards:

•

JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environmental Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air)

JESD51-3, Low Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages

JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages

JESD51-9, Test Boards for Area Array Surface Mount Package Thermal Measurements

(2) lfm = linear feet per minute

Submit Document Feedback

31

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.9 Thermal Resistance Characteristics for C280x 100-Ball GGM Package

°C/W⁽¹⁾

AIR FLOW (lfm)⁽²⁾

RΘ_JC

RΘ_JB

Junction-to-case thermal resistance

Junction-to-board thermal resistance

14.18

21.36

36.33

35.01

33.81

32.31

0.57

N/A

0

150

250

500

0

RΘ_JA

(High k PCB)

Junction-to-free air thermal resistance

Junction-to-package top

0.43

150

250

500

Psi_JT

0.52

0.67

(1) These values are based on a JEDEC defined 2S2P system (with the exception of the Theta JC [RΘ_JC] value, which is based on a

JEDEC defined 1S0P system) and will change based on environment as well as application. For more information, see these EIA/

JEDEC standards:

•

JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environmental Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air)

JESD51-3, Low Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages

JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages

JESD51-9, Test Boards for Area Array Surface Mount Package Thermal Measurements

(2) lfm = linear feet per minute

8.10 Thermal Resistance Characteristics for C280x 100-Pin PZ Package

°C/W⁽¹⁾

AIR FLOW (lfm)⁽²⁾

RΘ_JC

RΘ_JB

Junction-to-case thermal resistance

Junction-to-board thermal resistance

13.52

54.78

69.81

60.34

57.46

53.63

0.42

N/A

0

150

250

500

0

RΘ_JA

(High k PCB)

Junction-to-free air thermal resistance

Junction-to-package top

1.23

150

250

500

Psi_JT

1.54

2.11

(1) These values are based on a JEDEC defined 2S2P system (with the exception of the Theta JC [RΘ_JC] value, which is based on a

JEDEC defined 1S0P system) and will change based on environment as well as application. For more information, see these EIA/

JEDEC standards:

•

JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environmental Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air)

JESD51-3, Low Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages

JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages

JESD51-9, Test Boards for Area Array Surface Mount Package Thermal Measurements

(2) lfm = linear feet per minute

32

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.11 Thermal Resistance Characteristics for F2809 100-Ball GGM Package

°C/W⁽¹⁾

AIR FLOW (lfm)⁽²⁾

RΘ_JC

RΘ_JB

Junction-to-case thermal resistance

Junction-to-board thermal resistance

10.36

13.3

N/A

0

28.15

26.89

25.68

24.22

0.38

150

250

500

0

RΘ_JA

(High k PCB)

Junction-to-free air thermal resistance

Junction-to-package top

0.35

150

250

500

Psi_JT

0.33

0.44

(1) These values are based on a JEDEC defined 2S2P system (with the exception of the Theta JC [RΘ_JC] value, which is based on a

JEDEC defined 1S0P system) and will change based on environment as well as application. For more information, see these EIA/

JEDEC standards:

•

JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environmental Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air)

JESD51-3, Low Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages

JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages

JESD51-9, Test Boards for Area Array Surface Mount Package Thermal Measurements

(2) lfm = linear feet per minute

8.12 Thermal Resistance Characteristics for F2809 100-Pin PZ Package

°C/W⁽¹⁾

AIR FLOW (lfm)⁽²⁾

RΘ_JC

RΘ_JB

Junction-to-case thermal resistance

Junction-to-board thermal resistance

7.06

28.76

44.02

28.34

36.28

33.68

0.2

N/A

0

150

250

500

0

RΘ_JA

(High k PCB)

Junction-to-free air thermal resistance

Junction-to-package top

0.56

0.7

150

250

500

Psi_JT

0.95

(1) These values are based on a JEDEC defined 2S2P system (with the exception of the Theta JC [RΘ_JC] value, which is based on a

JEDEC defined 1S0P system) and will change based on environment as well as application. For more information, see these EIA/

JEDEC standards:

•

JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environmental Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air)

JESD51-3, Low Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages

JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages

JESD51-9, Test Boards for Area Array Surface Mount Package Thermal Measurements

(2) lfm = linear feet per minute

8.13 Thermal Design Considerations

Based on the end application design and operational profile, the I_DDand I_DDIOcurrents could vary. Systems with

more than 1 Watt power dissipation may require a product level thermal design. Care should be taken to keep T_j

within specified limits. In the end applications, T_caseshould be measured to estimate the operating junction

temperature T_j. T_caseis normally measured at the center of the package top side surface. The thermal

application note Semiconductor and IC package thermal metrics helps to understand the thermal metrics and

definitions.

Submit Document Feedback

33

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14 Timing and Switching Characteristics

8.14.1 Timing Parameter Symbology

Timing parameter symbols used are created in accordance with JEDEC Standard 100. To shorten the symbols,

some of the pin names and other related terminology have been abbreviated as follows:

Lowercase subscripts and their

meanings:

Letters and symbols and their

meanings:

a

c

d

f

access time

cycle time (period)

delay time

H

L

High

Low

V

X

Z

Valid

fall time

Unknown, changing, or don't care level

High impedance

h

r

hold time

rise time

su

t

setup time

transition time

valid time

v

w

pulse duration (width)

8.14.1.1 General Notes on Timing Parameters

All output signals from the 28x devices (including XCLKOUT) are derived from an internal clock such that all

output transitions for a given half-cycle occur with a minimum of skewing relative to each other.

The signal combinations shown in the following timing diagrams may not necessarily represent actual cycles. For

actual cycle examples, see the appropriate cycle description section of this document.

8.14.1.2 Test Load Circuit

This test load circuit is used to measure all switching characteristics provided in this document.

Tester Pin Electronics

Data Sheet Timing Reference Point

W

3.5 nH

Output

Under

Test

42

Transmission Line

(A)

Z0 = 50 W

Device Pin^(B)

4.0 pF

1.85 pF

A. Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the device pin.

B. The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its transmission line effects

must be taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns or longer can be used to produce the desired transmission line

effect. The transmission line is intended as a load only. It is not necessary to add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns or longer)

from the data sheet timing.

Figure 8-5. 3.3-V Test Load Circuit

34

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.1.3 Device Clock Table

This section provides the timing requirements and switching characteristics for the various clock options

available on the 280x DSPs. Section 8.14.1.3.1 and Section 8.14.1.3.2 list the cycle times of various clocks.

8.14.1.3.1 TMS320x280x Clock Table and Nomenclature (100-MHz Devices)

MIN

28.6

20

10

4

NOM

MAX UNIT

t_c(OSC), Cycle time

Frequency

50

35

ns

MHz

ns

On-chip oscillator

clock

t_c(CI), Cycle time

250

100

500

100

2000

100

XCLKIN⁽¹⁾

Frequency

MHz

ns

t_c(SCO), Cycle time

Frequency

10

2

SYSCLKOUT

XCLKOUT

HSPCLK⁽²⁾

LSPCLK⁽²⁾

MHz

ns

t_c(XCO), Cycle time

Frequency

10

0.5

10

MHz

ns

t_c(HCO), Cycle time

Frequency

20⁽³⁾

50⁽³⁾

40⁽³⁾

25⁽³⁾

100

12.5

25

MHz

ns

t_c(LCO), Cycle time

Frequency

10

80

40

MHz

ns

t_c(ADCCLK), Cycle time (All devices except F2809)

Frequency (All devices except F2809)

t_c(ADCCLK), Cycle time (F2809)

Frequency (F2809)

MHz

ns

ADC clock

MHz

(1) This also applies to the X1 pin if a 1.8-V oscillator is used.

(2) Lower LSPCLK and HSPCLK will reduce device power consumption.

(3) This is the default reset value if SYSCLKOUT = 100 MHz.

8.14.1.3.2 TMS320x280x/2801x Clock Table and Nomenclature (60-MHz Devices)

MIN

28.6

20

NOM

MAX UNIT

t_c(OSC), Cycle time

Frequency

50

35

ns

MHz

ns

On-chip oscillator

clock

t_c(CI), Cycle time

Frequency

16.67

4

250

60

XCLKIN⁽¹⁾

SYSCLKOUT

XCLKOUT

HSPCLK⁽²⁾

LSPCLK⁽²⁾

ADC clock

MHz

ns

t_c(SCO), Cycle time

Frequency

16.67

2

500

60

MHz

ns

t_c(XCO), Cycle time

Frequency

16.67

0.5

2000

60

MHz

ns

t_c(HCO), Cycle time

Frequency

16.67

33.3⁽³⁾

30⁽³⁾

60

MHz

ns

t_c(LCO), Cycle time

Frequency

16.67

66.7⁽³⁾

15⁽³⁾

MHz

ns

t_c(ADCCLK), Cycle time

Frequency

133.33

7.5

MHz

(1) This also applies to the X1 pin if a 1.8-V oscillator is used.

(2) Lower LSPCLK and HSPCLK will reduce device power consumption.

(3) This is the default reset value if SYSCLKOUT = 60 MHz.

Submit Document Feedback

35

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.2 Power Sequencing

No requirements are placed on the power up/down sequence of the various power pins to ensure the correct

reset state for all the modules. However, if the 3.3-V transistors in the level shifting output buffers of the I/O pins

are powered prior to the 1.8-V transistors, it is possible for the output buffers to turn on, causing a glitch to occur

on the pin during power up. To avoid this behavior, power the V_DD(core voltage) pins prior to or simultaneously

with the V_DDIO(input/output voltage) pins, ensuring that the V_DDpins have reached 0.7 V before the V_DDIOpins

reach 0.7 V.

There are some requirements on the XRS pin:

1. During power up, the XRS pin must be held low for t_w(RSL1)after the input clock is stable (see Section

8.14.2.1). This is to enable the entire device to start from a known condition.

2. During power down, the XRS pin must be pulled low at least 8 μs prior to V_DDreaching 1.5 V. This is to

enhance flash reliability.

No voltage larger than a diode drop (0.7 V) above V_DDIOshould be applied to any digital pin (for analog pins, it is

0.7 V above V_DDA) prior to powering up the device. Voltages applied to pins on an unpowered device can bias

internal p-n junctions in unintended ways and produce unpredictable results.

36

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.2.1 Reset ( XRS) Timing Requirements

MIN

8t_c(OSCCLK)

NOM

MAX UNIT

cycles

(1)

t_w(RSL1)

t_w(RSL2)

Pulse duration, stable XCLKIN to XRS high

Pulse duration, XRS low

Warm reset

cycles

Pulse duration, reset pulse generated by

watchdog

t_w(WDRS)

t_d(EX)

512t_c(OSCCLK)

cycles

Delay time, address/data valid after XRS high

Oscillator start-up time

32t_c(OSCCLK)

10

cycles

ms

(2)

t_OSCST

1

t_h(boot-mode)

Hold time for boot-mode pins

200t_c(OSCCLK)

cycles

(1) In addition to the t_w(RSL1)requirement, XRS has to be low at least for 1 ms after V_DDreaches 1.5 V.

(2) Dependent on crystal/resonator and board design.

XCLKIN

X1/X2

OSCCLK/8

XCLKOUT

XRS

User-Code Dependent

OSCCLK * 5

t

w(RSL2)

User-Code Execution Phase

t

d(EX)

Address/Data/

Control

(Internal)

(Don’t Care)

User-Code Execution

(A)

t

Boot-ROM Execution Starts

GPIO Pins as Input

h(boot-mode)

Boot-Mode

Pins

Peripheral/GPIO Function

User-Code Dependent

Peripheral/GPIO Function

User-Code Execution Starts

I/O Pins

GPIO Pins as Input (State Depends on Internal PU/PD)

User-Code Dependent

A. After reset, the Boot ROM code samples BOOT Mode pins. Based on the status of the Boot Mode pin, the boot code branches to

destination memory or boot code function. If Boot ROM code executes after power-on conditions (in debugger environment), the Boot

code execution time is based on the current SYSCLKOUT speed. The SYSCLKOUT will be based on user environment and could be

with or without PLL enabled.

Figure 8-6. Warm Reset

Submit Document Feedback

37

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Figure 8-7 shows an example for the effect of writing into PLLCR register. In the first phase, PLLCR = 0x0004

and SYSCLKOUT = OSCCLK x 2. The PLLCR is then written with 0x0008. Right after the PLLCR register is

written, the PLL lock-up phase begins. During this phase, SYSCLKOUT = OSCCLK/2. After the PLL lock-up is

complete (which takes 131072 OSCCLK cycles), SYSCLKOUT reflects the new operating frequency, OSCCLK x

4.

OSCCLK

Write to PLLCR

SYSCLKOUT

OSCCLK * 2

OSCCLK/2

OSCCLK * 4

(Current CPU

Frequency)

(CPU Frequency While PLL is Stabilizing

With the Desired Frequency. This Period

(PLL Lock-up Time, t ) is

(Changed CPU Frequency)

p

131072 OSCCLK Cycles Long.)

Figure 8-7. Example of Effect of Writing Into PLLCR Register

38

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.3 Clock Requirements and Characteristics

8.14.3.1 Input Clock Frequency

PARAMETER

MIN

20

4

TYP MAX UNIT

Resonator (X1/X2)

35

Crystal (X1/X2)

35

MHz

100

f_x

Input clock frequency

100-MHz device

60-MHz device

External oscillator/clock

source (XCLKIN or X1 pin)

4

60

f_l

Limp mode SYSCLKOUT frequency range (with /2 enabled)

1–5

MHz

8.14.3.2 XCLKIN Timing Requirements - PLL Enabled

NO.⁽¹⁾

MIN

MAX UNIT

C8

C9

t_c(CI)

t_f(CI)

Cycle time, XCLKIN

33.3

200

6

ns

Fall time, XCLKIN

C10 t_r(CI)

Rise time, XCLKIN

6

C11 t_w(CIL)

C12 t_w(CIH)

Pulse duration, XCLKIN low as a percentage of t_c(OSCCLK)

Pulse duration, XCLKIN high as a percentage of t_c(OSCCLK)

45%

55%

(1) This applies to the X1 pin also.

8.14.3.3 XCLKIN Timing Requirements - PLL Disabled

NO.⁽¹⁾

MIN

10

MAX UNIT

100-MHz device

60-MHz device

Up to 20 MHz

250

ns

250

C8 t_c(CI)

C9 t_f(CI)

C10 t_r(CI)

Cycle time, XCLKIN

Fall time, XCLKIN

Rise time, XCLKIN

16.67

6

2

ns

20 MHz to 100 MHz

Up to 20 MHz

6

20 MHz to 100 MHz

2

C11 t_w(CIL)

C12 t_w(CIH)

Pulse duration, XCLKIN low as a percentage of t_c(OSCCLK)

Pulse duration, XCLKIN high as a percentage of t_c(OSCCLK)

45%

55%

The possible configuration modes are shown in Table 9-33.

8.14.3.4 XCLKOUT Switching Characteristics (PLL Bypassed or Enabled)

NO.

PARAMETER

MIN

TYP

MAX UNIT

(1) (2)

100-MHz device

60-MHz device

10

C1 t_c(XCO)

Cycle time, XCLKOUT

ns

16.67

C3 t_f(XCO)

C4 t_r(XCO)

C5 t_w(XCOL)

C6 t_w(XCOH)

t_p

Fall time, XCLKOUT

2

ns

Rise time, XCLKOUT

Pulse duration, XCLKOUT low

Pulse duration, XCLKOUT high

PLL lock time

H – 2

H + 2

ns

H + 2

(3)

131072t_c(OSCCLK)

cycles

(1) A load of 40 pF is assumed for these parameters.

(2) H = 0.5t_c(XCO)

(3) OSCCLK is either the output of the on-chip oscillator or the output from an external oscillator.

Submit Document Feedback

39

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

C10

C9

C8

(A)

XCLKIN

C6

C3

C1

C4

C5

(B)

XCLKOUT

A. The relationship of XCLKIN to XCLKOUT depends on the divide factor chosen. The waveform relationship shown is intended to illustrate

the timing parameters only and may differ based on actual configuration.

B. XCLKOUT configured to reflect SYSCLKOUT.

Figure 8-8. Clock Timing

40

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.4 Peripherals

8.14.4.1 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)

8.14.4.1.1 GPIO - Output Timing

8.14.4.1.1.1 General-Purpose Output Switching Characteristics

PARAMETER

MIN

MAX

8

UNIT

ns

t_r(GPO)

t_f(GPO)

t_fGPO

Rise time, GPIO switching low to high

Fall time, GPIO switching high to low

Toggling frequency, GPO pins

All GPIOs

8

ns

25

MHz

GPIO

t

r(GPO)

t

f(GPO)

Figure 8-9. General-Purpose Output Timing

8.14.4.1.2 GPIO - Input Timing

8.14.4.1.2.1 General-Purpose Input Timing Requirements

MIN

1t_c(SCO)

MAX

UNIT

cycles

QUALPRD = 0

t_w(SP)

Sampling period

QUALPRD ≠ 0

2t_c(SCO)* QUALPRD

t_w(SP)* (n⁽¹⁾– 1)

t_w(IQSW)

Input qualifier sampling window

Pulse duration, GPIO low/high

Synchronous mode

With input qualifier

2t_c(SCO)

(2)

t_w(GPI)

t_w(IQSW)+ t_w(SP)+ 1t_c(SCO)

(1) "n" represents the number of qualification samples as defined by GPxQSELn register.

(2) For t_w(GPI), pulse width is measured from V_ILto V_ILfor an active low signal and V_IHto V_IHfor an active high signal.

(A)

GPIO Signal

GPxQSELn = 1,0 (6 samples)

1

0

1

0

1

t

Sampling Period determined

(B)

w(SP)

by GPxCTRL[QUALPRD]

t

w(IQSW)

(C)

(SYSCLKOUT cycle * 2 * QUALPRD) * 5

)

Sampling Window

SYSCLKOUT

QUALPRD = 1

(SYSCLKOUT/2)

(D)

Output From

Qualifier

A. This glitch will be ignored by the input qualifier. The QUALPRD bit field specifies the qualification sampling period. It can vary from 00 to

0xFF. If QUALPRD = 00, then the sampling period is 1 SYSCLKOUT cycle. For any other value "n", the qualification sampling period in

2n SYSCLKOUT cycles (that is, at every 2n SYSCLKOUT cycles, the GPIO pin will be sampled).

B. The qualification period selected via the GPxCTRL register applies to groups of 8 GPIO pins.

C. The qualification block can take either three or six samples. The GPxQSELn Register selects which sample mode is used.

Submit Document Feedback

41

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

D. In the example shown, for the qualifier to detect the change, the input should be stable for 10 SYSCLKOUT cycles or greater. In other

words, the inputs should be stable for (5 x QUALPRD x 2) SYSCLKOUT cycles. This would ensure 5 sampling periods for detection to

occur. Since external signals are driven asynchronously, an 13-SYSCLKOUT-wide pulse ensures reliable recognition.

Figure 8-10. Sampling Mode

42

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.4.1.3 Sampling Window Width for Input Signals

The following section summarizes the sampling window width for input signals for various input qualifier

configurations.

Sampling frequency denotes how often a signal is sampled with respect to SYSCLKOUT.

Sampling frequency = SYSCLKOUT/(2 * QUALPRD), if QUALPRD ≠ 0

Sampling frequency = SYSCLKOUT, if QUALPRD = 0

Sampling period = SYSCLKOUT cycle x 2 x QUALPRD, if QUALPRD ≠ 0

In the above equations, SYSCLKOUT cycle indicates the time period of SYSCLKOUT.

Sampling period = SYSCLKOUT cycle, if QUALPRD = 0

In a given sampling window, either 3 or 6 samples of the input signal are taken to determine the validity of the

signal. This is determined by the value written to GPxQSELn register.

Case 1:

Qualification using 3 samples

Sampling window width = (SYSCLKOUT cycle x 2 x QUALPRD) x 2, if QUALPRD ≠ 0

Sampling window width = (SYSCLKOUT cycle) x 2, if QUALPRD = 0

Case 2:

Qualification using 6 samples

Sampling window width = (SYSCLKOUT cycle x 2 x QUALPRD) x 5, if QUALPRD ≠ 0

Sampling window width = (SYSCLKOUT cycle) x 5, if QUALPRD = 0

SYSCLK

GPIOxn

t_w(GPI)

Figure 8-11. General-Purpose Input Timing

Note

The pulse-width requirement for general-purpose input is applicable for the XINT2_ADCSOC signal as

well.

Submit Document Feedback

43

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.4.1.4 Low-Power Mode Wakeup Timing

Section 8.14.4.1.4.1 shows the timing requirements, Section 8.14.4.1.4.2 shows the switching characteristics,

and Figure 8-12 shows the timing diagram for IDLE mode.

8.14.4.1.4.1 IDLE Mode Timing Requirements

MIN⁽¹⁾

2t_c(SCO)

MAX

UNIT

Without input qualifier

With input qualifier

t_w(WAKE-INT)

Pulse duration, external wake-up signal

cycles

5t_c(SCO)+ t_w(IQSW)

(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Section 8.14.4.1.2.1.

8.14.4.1.4.2 IDLE Mode Switching Characteristics

PARAMETER⁽¹⁾

TEST CONDITIONS

MIN

MAX

UNIT

Delay time, external wake signal to program

execution resume ⁽²⁾

•

Wake-up from Flash

Flash module in active state

Without input qualifier

With input qualifier

Without input qualifier

With input qualifier

Without input qualifier

With input qualifier

20t_c(SCO)

cycles

–

20t_c(SCO)+ t_w(IQSW)

1050t_c(SCO)

t_d(WAKE-IDLE)

Wake-up from Flash

Flash module in sleep state

–

1050t_c(SCO)+ t_w(IQSW)

20t_c(SCO)

Wake-up from SARAM

20t_c(SCO)+ t_w(IQSW)

(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Section 8.14.4.1.2.1.

(2) This is the time taken to begin execution of the instruction that immediately follows the IDLE instruction. execution of an ISR (triggered

by the wake up) signal involves additional latency.

t

d(WAKE−IDLE)

Address/Data

(internal)

XCLKOUT

t

w(WAKE−INT)

(A)

WAKE INT

A. WAKE INT can be any enabled interrupt, WDINT, XNMI, or XRS.

Figure 8-12. IDLE Entry and Exit Timing

44

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.4.1.4.3 STANDBY Mode Timing Requirements

TEST CONDITIONS

MIN

3t_c(OSCCLK)

MAX

UNIT

Without input qualification

With input qualification⁽¹⁾

Pulse duration, external

wake-up signal

t_w(WAKE-INT)

cycles

(2 + QUALSTDBY) * t_c(OSCCLK)

(1) QUALSTDBY is a 6-bit field in the LPMCR0 register.

8.14.4.1.4.4 STANDBY Mode Switching Characteristics

PARAMETER

TEST CONDITIONS

MIN

MAX

UNIT

Delay time, IDLE instruction

executed to XCLKOUT low

t_d(IDLE-XCOL)

32t_c(SCO)

45t_c(SCO)cycles

Delay time, external wake signal to

program execution resume⁽¹⁾

•

Wake up from flash

Flash module in active state

Without input qualifier

With input qualifier

Without input qualifier

With input qualifier

Without input qualifier

With input qualifier

100t_c(SCO)

cycles

–

100t_c(SCO)+ t_w(WAKE-INT)

t_d(WAKE-STBY)

•

Wake up from flash

Flash module in sleep state

1125t_c(SCO)

1125t_c(SCO)+ t_w(WAKE-INT)

100t_c(SCO)

cycles

–

•

Wake up from SARAM

100t_c(SCO)+ t_w(WAKE-INT)

(1) This is the time taken to begin execution of the instruction that immediately follows the IDLE instruction. execution of an ISR (triggered

by the wake up signal) involves additional latency.

(A)

(C)

(E)

(D)

(B)

(F)

Device

Status

STANDBY

Normal Execution

Flushing Pipeline

Wake−up

Signal

t

w(WAKE-INT)

t

d(WAKE-STBY)

X1/X2 or

X1 or

XCLKIN

XCLKOUT

t

d(IDLE−XCOL)

A. IDLE instruction is executed to put the device into STANDBY mode.

B. The PLL block responds to the STANDBY signal. SYSCLKOUT is held for approximately 32 cycles (if CLKINDIV = 0) or 64 cycles (if

CLKINDIV = 1) before being turned off. This delay enables the CPU pipe and any other pending operations to flush properly.

C. Clock to the peripherals are turned off. However, the PLL and watchdog are not shut down. The device is now in STANDBY mode.

D. The external wake-up signal is driven active.

E. After a latency period, the STANDBY mode is exited.

F. Normal execution resumes. The device will respond to the interrupt (if enabled).

Figure 8-13. STANDBY Entry and Exit Timing Diagram

Submit Document Feedback

45

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.4.1.4.5 HALT Mode Timing Requirements

MIN

MAX

UNIT

cycles

(1)

t_w(WAKE-GPIO)

t_w(WAKE-XRS)

Pulse duration, GPIO wake-up signal

Pulse duration, XRS wakeup signal

t_oscst+ 2t_c(OSCCLK)

t_oscst+ 8t_c(OSCCLK)

(1) See Section 8.14.2.1 for an explanation of t_oscst

.

8.14.4.1.4.6 HALT Mode Switching Characteristics

PARAMETER

MIN

32t_c(SCO)

MAX

45t_c(SCO)

UNIT

cycles

t_d(IDLE-XCOL)

t_p

Delay time, IDLE instruction executed to XCLKOUT low

PLL lock-up time

131072t_c(OSCCLK)

Delay time, PLL lock to program execution resume

•

Wake up from flash

– Flash module in sleep state

1125t_c(SCO)

cycles

t_d(WAKE-HALT)

•

Wake up from SARAM

35t_c(SCO)

cycles

(G)

(A)

(C)

(E)

(B)

(D)

HALT

(F)

Device

Status

HALT

Flushing Pipeline

PLL Lock-up Time

Normal

Execution

Wake-up Latency

GPIOn

t

d(WAKE−HALT)

t

w(WAKE-GPIO)

t

p

X1/X2

or XCLKIN

Oscillator Start-up Time

XCLKOUT

t

d(IDLE−XCOL)

A. IDLE instruction is executed to put the device into HALT mode.

B. The PLL block responds to the HALT signal. SYSCLKOUT is held for approximately 32 cycles (if CLKINDIV = 0) or 64 cycles (if

CLKINDIV = 1) before the oscillator is turned off and the CLKIN to the core is stopped. This delay enables the CPU pipe and any other

pending operations to flush properly.

C. Clocks to the peripherals are turned off and the PLL is shut down. If a quartz crystal or ceramic resonator is used as the clock source,

the internal oscillator is shut down as well. The device is now in HALT mode and consumes absolute minimum power.

D. When the GPIOn pin (used to bring the device out of HALT) is driven low, the oscillator is turned on and the oscillator wake-up sequence

is initiated. The GPIO pin should be driven high only after the oscillator has stabilized. This enables the provision of a clean clock signal

during the PLL lock sequence. Since the falling edge of the GPIO pin asynchronously begins the wakeup process, care should be taken

to maintain a low noise environment prior to entering and during HALT mode.

E. Once the oscillator has stabilized, the PLL lock sequence is initiated, which takes 131,072 OSCCLK (X1/X2 or X1 or XCLKIN) cycles.

Note that these 131,072 clock cycles are applicable even when the PLL is disabled (that is, code execution will be delayed by this

duration even when the PLL is disabled).

F. Clocks to the core and peripherals are enabled. The HALT mode is now exited. The device will respond to the interrupt (if enabled), after

a latency.

G. Normal operation resumes.

Figure 8-14. HALT Wake-Up Using GPIOn

46

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.4.2 Enhanced Control Peripherals

8.14.4.2.1 Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM) Timing

PWM refers to PWM outputs on ePWM1–6. Section 8.14.4.2.1.1 shows the PWM timing requirements and

Section 8.14.4.2.1.2, switching characteristics.

8.14.4.2.1.1 ePWM Timing Requirements

TEST CONDITIONS⁽¹⁾

Asynchronous

MIN

2t_c(SCO)

MAX

UNIT

cycles

t_w(SYCIN)

Sync input pulse width

Synchronous

2t_c(SCO)

With input qualifier

1t_c(SCO)+ t_w(IQSW)

(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Section 8.14.4.1.2.1.

8.14.4.2.1.2 ePWM Switching Characteristics

PARAMETER

TEST CONDITIONS

MIN

20

MAX

UNIT

ns

t_w(PWM)

Pulse duration, PWMx output high/low

Sync output pulse width

t_w(SYNCOUT)

t_d(PWM)tza

8t_c(SCO)

cycles

Delay time, trip input active to PWM forced high

Delay time, trip input active to PWM forced low

no pin load

25

20

ns

t_d(TZ-PWM)HZ

Delay time, trip input active to PWM Hi-Z

8.14.4.2.2 Trip-Zone Input Timing

8.14.4.2.2.1 Trip-Zone input Timing Requirements

MIN⁽¹⁾

1t_c(SCO)

2t_c(SCO)

MAX UNIT

cycles

Asynchronous

Synchronous

t_w(TZ)

Pulse duration, TZx input low

cycles

With input qualifier

1t_c(SCO)+ t_w(IQSW)

cycles

(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Section 8.14.4.1.2.1.

SYSCLK

t_w(TZ)

TZ^(A)

t_d(TZ-PWM)HZ

PWM^(B)

A. TZ: TZ1, TZ2, TZ3, TZ4 , TZ5, TZ6

B. PWM refers to all the PWM pins in the device. The state of the PWM pins after TZ is taken high depends on the PWM recovery software.

Figure 8-15. PWM Hi-Z Characteristics

Submit Document Feedback

47

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.4.2.3 High-Resolution PWM Timing

Section 8.14.4.2.3.1 shows the high-resolution PWM switching characteristics.

8.14.4.2.3.1 High-Resolution PWM Characteristics at SYSCLKOUT = 60–100 MHz

MIN

TYP MAX UNIT

150 310 ps

Micro Edge Positioning (MEP) step size⁽¹⁾

(1) The MEP step size will be largest at high temperature and minimum voltage on V_DD. MEP step size will increase with higher

temperature and lower voltage and decrease with lower temperature and higher voltage.

Applications that use the HRPWM feature should use MEP Scale Factor Optimizer (SFO) estimation software functions. See the TI

software libraries for details of using SFO function in end applications. SFO functions help to estimate the number of MEP steps per

SYSCLKOUT period dynamically while the HRPWM is in operation.

8.14.4.2.4 Enhanced Capture (eCAP) Timing

Section 8.14.4.2.4.1 shows the eCAP timing requirement and Section 8.14.4.2.4.2 shows the eCAP switching

characteristics.

8.14.4.2.4.1 Enhanced Capture (eCAP) Timing Requirement

TEST CONDITIONS⁽¹⁾

Asynchronous

MIN

2t_c(SCO)

MAX UNIT

t_w(CAP)

Capture input pulse width

Synchronous

2t_c(SCO)

cycles

With input qualifier

1t_c(SCO)+ t_w(IQSW)

(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Section 8.14.4.1.2.1.

8.14.4.2.4.2 eCAP Switching Characteristics

PARAMETER

TEST CONDITIONS

MIN

MAX

UNIT

t_w(APWM)

Pulse duration, APWMx output high/low

20

ns

8.14.4.2.5 Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse (eQEP) Timing

Section 8.14.4.2.5.1 shows the eQEP timing requirement and Section 8.14.4.2.5.2 shows the eQEP switching

characteristics.

8.14.4.2.5.1 Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse (eQEP) Timing Requirements

TEST CONDITIONS⁽¹⁾

Asynchronous⁽²⁾/synchronous

With input qualifier

MIN

MAX

UNIT

2t_c(SCO)

t_w(QEPP)

QEP input period

cycles

2[1t_c(SCO)+ t_w(IQSW)

]

Asynchronous⁽²⁾/synchronous

2t_c(SCO)

2t_c(SCO)+t_w(IQSW)

2t_c(SCO)

t_w(INDEXH)

t_w(INDEXL)

t_w(STROBH)

t_w(STROBL)

QEP Index Input High time

QEP Index Input Low time

QEP Strobe High time

QEP Strobe Input Low time

cycles

With input qualifier

Asynchronous⁽²⁾/synchronous

With input qualifier

2t_c(SCO)+ t_w(IQSW)

2t_c(SCO)

2t_c(SCO)+ t_w(IQSW)

2t_c(SCO)

Asynchronous⁽²⁾/synchronous

With input qualifier

Asynchronous⁽²⁾/synchronous

With input qualifier

2t_c(SCO)+t_w(IQSW)

(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Section 8.14.4.1.2.1.

(2) Refer to the TMS320F280x, TMS320C280x, TMS320F2801x DSPs silicon errata for limitations in the asynchronous mode.

8.14.4.2.5.2 eQEP Switching Characteristics

PARAMETER

TEST CONDITIONS

MIN

MAX

UNIT

t_d(CNTR)xin

Delay time, external clock to counter increment

4t_c(SCO)cycles

48

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

PARAMETER

t_{d(PCS-OUT)QEP}Delay time, QEP input edge to position compare sync output

TEST CONDITIONS

MIN

MAX

UNIT

6t_c(SCO)cycles

Submit Document Feedback

49

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.4.2.6 ADC Start-of-Conversion Timing

8.14.4.2.6.1 External ADC Start-of-Conversion Switching Characteristics

PARAMETER

MIN

MAX

UNIT

t_w(ADCSOCAL)

Pulse duration, ADCSOCAO low

32t_{c(HCO )}

cycles

t

w(ADCSOCAL)

ADCSOCAO

or

ADCSOCBO

Figure 8-16. ADCSOCAO or ADCSOCBO Timing

8.14.4.3 External Interrupt Timing

8.14.4.3.1 External Interrupt Timing Requirements

MIN⁽¹⁾

1t_c(SCO)

MAX

UNIT

Synchronous

With qualifier

(2)

t_w(INT)

Pulse duration, INT input low/high

cycles

1t_c(SCO)+ t_w(IQSW)

(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Section 8.14.4.1.2.1.

(2) This timing is applicable to any GPIO pin configured for ADCSOC functionality.

8.14.4.3.2 External Interrupt Switching Characteristics

PARAMETER⁽¹⁾

MIN

MAX

t_w(IQSW)+ 12t_c(SCO)

UNIT

t_d(INT)

Delay time, INT low/high to interrupt-vector fetch

cycles

(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Section 8.14.4.1.2.1.

t

w(INT)

XNMI, XINT1, XINT2

t

d(INT)

Address bus

(internal)

Interrupt Vector

Figure 8-17. External Interrupt Timing

50

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.4.4 I2C Electrical Specification and Timing

8.14.4.4.1 I2C Timing

TEST CONDITIONS

MIN

MAX

400

UNIT

I2C clock module frequency is between

7 MHz and 12 MHz and I2C prescaler and

clock divider registers are configured

appropriately

f_SCL

SCL clock frequency

kHz

V_il

Low level input voltage

High level input voltage

Input hysteresis

0.3 V_DDIO

V

V_ih

V_hys

V_ol

0.7 V_DDIO

0.05 V_DDIO

0

Low level output voltage

3 mA sink current

0.4

I2C clock module frequency is between

7 MHz and 12 MHz and I2C prescaler and

clock divider registers are configured

appropriately

t_LOWLow period of SCL clock

t_HIGHHigh period of SCL clock

1.3

μs

I2C clock module frequency is between

7 MHz and 12 MHz and I2C prescaler and

clock divider registers are configured

appropriately

0.6

μs

Input current with an input voltage

between 0.1 V_DDIOand 0.9 V_DDIOMAX

l_I

–10

10

μA

Submit Document Feedback

51

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.4.5 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Timing

This section contains both Master Mode and Slave Mode timing data.

8.14.4.5.1 SPI Master Mode Timing

Section 8.14.4.5.1.1 lists the master mode timing (clock phase = 0) and Section 8.14.4.5.1.2 lists the master

mode timing (clock phase = 1). Figure 8-18 and Figure 8-19 show the timing waveforms.

8.14.4.5.1.1 SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0)

NO.⁽⁵⁾

BRR EVEN

MIN

BRR ODD

MIN

(4) (3) (2)

PARAMETER

UNIT

(1)

MAX

1

t_c(SPC)M

Cycle time, SPICLK

4t_c(LSPCLK)

128t_c(LSPCLK)

5t_c(LSPCLK)

127t_c(LSPCLK)

ns

Pulse duration, SPICLK first

pulse

0.5t_c(SPC)M+ 0.5t_c(LSPCLK)

– 10

0.5t_c(SPC)M

+

2

3

t_w(SPC1)M

0.5t_c(SPC)M– 10

0.5t_c(SPC)M+ 10

10

0.5t_c(LSPCLK)+ 10

Pulse duration, SPICLK second

pulse

0.5t_c(SPC)M– 0.5t_c(LSPCLK)

– 10

0.5t_c(SPC)M

–

t_w(SPC2)M

t_d(SIMO)M

t_v(SIMO)M

t_su(SOMI)M

t_h(SOMI)M

t_d(SPC)M

t_d(STE)M

0.5t_c(SPC)M– 10

ns

0.5t_c(LSPCLK)+ 10

Delay time, SPICLK to

SPISIMO valid

4

10

Valid time, SPISIMO valid after

SPICLK

0.5t_c(SPC)M– 0.5t_c(LSPCLK)

– 10

5

0.5t_c(SPC)M– 10

Setup time, SPISOMI before

SPICLK

8

35

0

35

0

Hold time, SPISOMI valid after

SPICLK

9

Delay time, SPISTE active to

SPICLK

1.5t_c(SPC)M

–

1.5t_c(SPC)M–

3t_c(SYSCLK)– 10

23

24

3t_c(SYSCLK)– 10

Delay time, SPICLK to SPISTE

inactive

0.5t_c(SPC)M– 0.5t_c(LSPCLK)

– 10

0.5t_c(SPC)M– 10

(1) The MASTER / SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is set and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is cleared.

(2) t_c(SPC)= SPI clock cycle time = LSPCLK/4 or LSPCLK/(SPIBRR +1)

(3) t_c(LCO)= LSPCLK cycle time

(4) Internal clock prescalers must be adjusted such that the SPI clock speed is limited to the following SPI clock rate:

Master mode transmit 25-MHz MAX, master mode receive 12.5-MHz MAX

Slave mode transmit 12.5-MAX, slave mode receive 12.5-MHz MAX.

(5) The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the clock polarity bit (SPICCR.6).

52

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

1

SPICLK

(clock polarity = 0)

2

3

SPICLK

(clock polarity = 1)

4

5

SPISIMO

Master Out Data Is Valid

8

9

Master In Data

Must Be Valid

SPISOMI

SPISTE

24

23

Figure 8-18. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0)

Submit Document Feedback

53

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

www.ti.com

UNIT

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

8.14.4.5.1.2 SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1)

NO.⁽¹⁾

BRR EVEN

MIN

BRR ODD

MIN

(2) (3) (4)

PARAMETER

(5)

MAX

127t_c(LSPCLK)

0.5t_c(SPC)M–

1

t_c(SPC)M

Cycle time, SPICLK

4t_c(LSPCLK)

128t_c(LSPCLK)

5t_c(LSPCLK)

0.5t_c(SPC)M

ns

Pulse duration, SPICLK first

pulse

–

2

3

t_w(SPC1)M

0.5t_c(SPC)M– 10

0.5t_c(SPC)M+ 10

0.5t_c(LSPCLK)– 10

0.5t_c(LSPCLK)+ 10

Pulse duration, SPICLK second

pulse

0.5t_c(SPC)M

+

0.5t_c(SPC)M

0.5t_c(LSPCLK)+ 10

+

t_w(SPC2)M

t_d(SIMO)M

t_v(SIMO)M

t_su(SOMI)M

t_h(SOMI)M

t_d(SPC)M

t_d(STE)M

0.5t_c(SPC)M– 10

ns

0.5t_c(LSPCLK)– 10

Delay time, SPISIMO valid to

SPICLK

0.5t_c(SPC)M

+

6

0.5t_c(SPC)M– 10

0.5t_c(LSPCLK)– 10

Valid time, SPISIMO valid after

SPICLK

0.5t_c(SPC)M

–

7

0.5t_c(SPC)M– 10

0.5t_c(LSPCLK)– 10

Setup time, SPISOMI before

SPICLK

10

11

23

24

35

0

35

Hold time, SPISOMI valid after

SPICLK

0

Delay time, SPISTE active to

SPICLK

2t_c(SPC)M

–

2t_c(SPC)M

–

3t_c(SYSCLK)– 10

Delay time, SPICLK to SPISTE

inactive

0.5t_c(SPC)

–

0.5t_c(SPC)– 10

0.5t_c(LSPCLK)– 10

(1) The MASTER/SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is set and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is set.

(2) t_c(SPC)= SPI clock cycle time = LSPCLK/4 or LSPCLK/(SPIBRR + 1)

(3) Internal clock prescalers must be adjusted such that the SPI clock speed is limited to the following SPI clock rate:

Master mode transmit 25 MHz MAX, master mode receive 12.5 MHz MAX

Slave mode transmit 12.5 MHz MAX, slave mode receive 12.5 MHz MAX.

(4) t_c(LCO)= LSPCLK cycle time

(5) The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPICCR.6).

1

SPICLK

(clock polarity = 0)

2

3

SPICLK

(clock polarity = 1)

6

7

SPISIMO

Master Out Data Is Valid

10

11

Master In Data Must

Be Valid

SPISOMI

SPISTE

24

23

Figure 8-19. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1)

54

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.4.5.2 SPI Slave Mode Timing

Section 8.14.4.5.2.1 lists the slave mode timing (clock phase = 0) and Section 8.14.4.5.2.2 lists the slave mode

timing (clock phase = 1). Figure 8-20 and Figure 8-21 show the timing waveforms.

8.14.4.5.2.1 SPI Slave Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0)

NO.

(1) (2)

PARAMETER

MIN

MAX UNIT

(4) (3)

(5)

12 t_c(SPC)S

13 t_w(SPC1)S

14 t_w(SPC2)S

15 t_d(SOMI)S

16 t_v(SOMI)S

19 t_su(SIMO)S

20 t_h(SIMO)S

25 t_su(STE)S

26 t_h(STE)S

Cycle time, SPICLK

4t_c(SYSCLK)

2t_c(SYSCLK)– 1

ns

Pulse duration, SPICLK first pulse

Pulse duration, SPICLK second pulse

Delay time, SPICLK to SPISOMI valid

Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK

Setup time, SPISIMO valid before SPICLK

Hold time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK

Setup time, SPISTE active before SPICLK

Hold time, SPISTE inactive after SPICLK

35

ns

0

1.5t_c(SYSCLK)

(1) The MASTER / SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is cleared and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is cleared.

(2) t_c(SPC)= SPI clock cycle time = LSPCLK/4 or LSPCLK/(SPIBRR + 1)

(3) t_c(LCO)= LSPCLK cycle time

(4) Internal clock prescalers must be adjusted such that the SPI clock speed is limited to the following SPI clock rate:

Master mode transmit 25-MHz MAX, master mode receive 12.5-MHz MAX

Slave mode transmit 12.5-MHz MAX, slave mode receive 12.5-MHz MAX.

(5) The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPICCR.6).

12

SPICLK

(clock polarity = 0)

13

14

SPICLK

(clock polarity = 1)

15

16

SPISOMI

SPISOMI Data Is Valid

19

20

SPISIMO Data

Must Be Valid

SPISIMO

SPISTE

25

26

Figure 8-20. SPI Slave Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0)

Submit Document Feedback

55

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.4.5.2.2 SPI Slave Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1)

NO.

(1) (2)

PARAMETER

MIN

MAX UNIT

(3) (4)

12 t_c(SPC)S

13 t_w(SPC1)S

14 t_w(SPC2)S

17 t_d(SOMI)S

18 t_v(SOMI)S

21 t_su(SIMO)S

22 t_h(SIMO)S

25 t_su(STE)S

26 t_h(STE)S

Cycle time, SPICLK

4t_c(SYSCLK)

2t_c(SYSCLK)– 1

ns

Pulse duration, SPICLK first pulse

Pulse duration, SPICLK second pulse

Delay time, SPICLK to SPISOMI valid

Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK

Setup time, SPISIMO valid before SPICLK

Hold time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK

Setup time, SPISTE active before SPICLK

Hold time, SPISTE inactive after SPICLK

35

0

1.5t_c(SYSCLK)

(1) The MASTER / SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is cleared and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is cleared.

(2) t_c(SPC)= SPI clock cycle time = LSPCLK/4 or LSPCLK/(SPIBRR + 1)

(3) Internal clock prescalers must be adjusted such that the SPI clock speed is limited to the following SPI clock rate:

Master mode transmit 25-MHz MAX, master mode receive 12.5-MHz MAX

Slave mode transmit 12.5-MHz MAX, slave mode receive 12.5-MHz MAX.

(4) The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPICCR.6).

12

SPICLK

(clock polarity = 0)

13

14

SPICLK

(clock polarity = 1)

17

SPISOMI

SPISOMI Data Is Valid

Data Valid

18

21

22

SPISIMO Data

Must Be Valid

SPISIMO

SPISTE

26

25

Figure 8-21. SPI Slave Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1)

56

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.5 Emulator Connection Without Signal Buffering for the DSP

Figure 8-22 shows the connection between the DSP and JTAG header for a single-processor configuration. If the

distance between the JTAG header and the DSP is greater than 6 inches, the emulation signals must be

buffered. If the distance is less than 6 inches, buffering is typically not needed. Figure 8-22 shows the simpler,

no-buffering situation. For the pullup/pulldown resistor values, see Section 7.2.

6 inches or less

V_DDIO

13

5

EMU0

EMU1

TRST

TMS

TDI

EMU0

EMU1

PD

14

2

4

6

8

GND

TRST

TMS

1

3

TDI

7

10

12

TDO

TCK

TDO

11

TCK

9

TCK_RET

DSP

JTAG Header

Figure 8-22. Emulator Connection Without Signal Buffering for the DSP

Submit Document Feedback

57

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.14.6 Flash Timing

8.14.6.1 Flash Endurance for A and S Temperature Material

ERASE/PROGRAM

MIN

TYP

MAX

UNIT

TEMPERATURE⁽¹⁾

N_f

Flash endurance for the array (write/erase cycles)

0°C to 85°C (ambient)

20000

50000

cycles

write

N_OTPOTP endurance for the array (write cycles)

1

(1) Write/erase operations outside of the temperature ranges indicated are not specified and may affect the endurance numbers.

8.14.6.2 Flash Endurance for Q Temperature Material

ERASE/PROGRAM

MIN

TYP

MAX

UNIT

TEMPERATURE⁽¹⁾

N_f

Flash endurance for the array (write/erase cycles)

–40°C to 125°C (ambient)

20000

50000

cycles

write

N_OTPOTP endurance for the array (write cycles)

1

(1) Write/erase operations outside of the temperature ranges indicated are not specified and may affect the endurance numbers.

8.14.6.3 Flash Parameters at 100-MHz SYSCLKOUT

PARAMETER

16-Bit Word

TEST CONDITIONS

MIN

TYP

50

500

250

125

2

MAX

UNIT

μs

16K Sector

8K Sector

4K Sector

16K Sector

2000⁽²⁾

15⁽²⁾

ms

s

Program

Time⁽¹⁾

Erase Time⁽³⁾8K Sector

2

15⁽²⁾

s

4K Sector

2

15⁽²⁾

s

Erase

Program

75

35

mA

V_DD3VFLcurrent consumption during the Erase/

Program cycle

(4)

I_DD3VFLP

V_DDcurrent consumption during Erase/

Program cycle

(4)

I_DDP

140

20

mA

V_DDIOcurrent consumption during Erase/

Program cycle

(4)

I_DDIOP

(1) Program time is at the maximum device frequency. The programming time indicated in this table is applicable only when all the

required code/data is available in the device RAM, ready for programming. Program time includes overhead of the flash state machine

but does not include the time to transfer the following into RAM:

•

the code that uses flash API to program the flash

the Flash API itself

Flash data to be programmed

(2) The parameters mentioned in the MAX column are for the first 100 Erase/Program cycles.

(3) The on-chip flash memory is in an erased state when the device is shipped from TI. As such, erasing the flash memory is not required

before programming, when programming the device for the first time. However, the erase operation is needed on all subsequent

programming operations.

(4) Typical parameters as seen at room temperature including function call overhead, with all peripherals off. It is important to maintain a

stable power supply during the entire flash programming process. It is conceivable that device current consumption during flash

programming could be higher than normal operating conditions. The power supply used should ensure V_MINon the supply rails at all

times, as specified in the Recommended Operating Conditions of the data sheet. Any brownout or interruption to power during erasing/

programming could potentially corrupt the password locations and lock the device permanently. Powering a target board (during flash

programming) through the USB port is not recommended, as the port may be unable to respond to the power demands placed during

the programming process.

8.14.6.4 Flash/OTP Access Timing

PARAMETER

MIN

36

MAX UNIT

t_a(fp)

t_a(fr)

Paged flash access time

Random flash access time

ns

36

58

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

PARAMETER

MIN

MAX UNIT

t_a(OTP)

OTP access time

60

ns

8.14.6.5 Flash Data Retention Duration

PARAMETER

TEST CONDITIONS

T_J= 55°C

MIN

15

MAX UNIT

t_retention

Data retention duration

years

Table 8-2. Minimum Required Flash/OTP Wait-States at Different Frequencies

SYSCLKOUT

(MHz)

FLASH PAGE

WAIT-STATE

FLASH RANDOM

WAIT-STATE⁽¹⁾

SYSCLKOUT (ns)

OTP WAIT-STATE

100

75

60

50

30

25

15

4

10

13.33

16.67

20

3

2

1

0

3

2

1

5

4

3

2

1

33.33

40

66.67

250

(1) Random wait-state must be greater than or equal to 1.

Equations to compute the Flash page wait-state and random wait-state in Table 8-2 are as follows:

t_a(fp)

Flash Page Wait-State

+

ǒ Ǔ* 1

ƪ ƫ_{(round up to the next highest integer) or 0, whichever is larger}

t_c(SCO)

t_a(fr)

(round up to the next highest integer) or 1, whichever is larger

Flash Random Wait-State

+

ǒ Ǔ* 1

ƪ ƫ

t_c(SCO)

Equation to compute the OTP wait-state in Table 8-2 is as follows:

t_a(OTP)

OTP Wait-State

+

ǒ Ǔ* 1

ƪ ƫ_{(round up to the next highest integer) or 1, whichever is larger}

t_c(SCO)

Submit Document Feedback

59

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.15 On-Chip Analog-to-Digital Converter

8.15.1 ADC Electrical Characteristics

over recommended operating conditions

PARAMETER^{(1) (2)}

MIN

TYP

MAX

UNIT

Bits

DC SPECIFICATIONS

Resolution

12

0.001

60-MHz device

7.5

12.5

25

ADC clock

100-MHz device

MHz

100-MHz device (F2809 only)

ACCURACY

1–12.5 MHz ADC clock (6.25 MSPS)

12.5–25 MHz ADC clock (12.5 MSPS)

±1.5

±2

INL (Integral nonlinearity)

LSB

DNL (Differential nonlinearity)⁽³⁾

Offset error⁽⁴⁾

±1

LSB

–60

+60

Offset error with hardware trimming

Overall gain error with internal reference⁽⁵⁾

Overall gain error with external reference

Channel-to-channel offset variation

Channel-to-channel gain variation

ANALOG INPUT

±4

–60

+60

±4

Analog input voltage (ADCINx to ADCLO)⁽⁶⁾

0

3

5

V

ADCLO

–5

0

mV

pF

μA

Input capacitance

10

Input leakage current

±5

INTERNAL VOLTAGE REFERENCE ⁽⁵⁾

V_ADCREFP- ADCREFP output voltage at the pin

based on internal reference

1.275

0.525

V

V_ADCREFM- ADCREFM output voltage at the pin

based on internal reference

Voltage difference, ADCREFP - ADCREFM

0.75

50

V

Temperature coefficient

PPM/°C

EXTERNAL VOLTAGE REFERENCE ^{(5) (7)}

ADCREFSEL[15:14] = 11b

ADCREFSEL[15:14] = 10b

ADCREFSEL[15:14] = 01b

1.024

1.500

2.048

V

V_ADCREFIN- External reference voltage input on

ADCREFIN pin 0.2% or better accurate

reference recommended

AC SPECIFICATIONS

SINAD (100 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio +

distortion

67.5

dB

SNR (100 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio

68

–79

10.9

83

dB

THD (100 kHz) Total harmonic distortion

ENOB (100 kHz) Effective number of bits

SFDR (100 kHz) Spurious free dynamic range

Bits

dB

(1) Tested at 12.5 MHz ADCCLK.

(2) All voltages listed in this table are with respect to V_SSA2

(3) TI specifies that the ADC will have no missing codes.

(4) 1 LSB has the weighted value of 3.0/4096 = 0.732 mV.

.

(5) A single internal/external band gap reference sources both ADCREFP and ADCREFM signals, and hence, these voltages track

together. The ADC converter uses the difference between these two as its reference. The total gain error listed for the internal

60

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

reference is inclusive of the movement of the internal bandgap over temperature. Gain error over temperature for the external

reference option will depend on the temperature profile of the source used.

(6) Voltages above V_DDA+ 0.3 V or below V_SS- 0.3 V applied to an analog input pin may temporarily affect the conversion of another pin.

To avoid this, the analog inputs should be kept within these limits.

(7) TI recommends using high precision external reference TI part REF3020/3120 or equivalent for 2.048-V reference.

8.15.2 ADC Power-Up Control Bit Timing

ADC Power Up Delay

ADC Ready for Conversions

PWDNBG

PWDNREF

t

d(BGR)

PWDNADC

t

d(PWD)

Request for

ADC

Conversion

Figure 8-23. ADC Power-Up Control Bit Timing

8.15.2.1 ADC Power-Up Delays

PARAMETER⁽¹⁾

MIN

TYP

MAX

UNIT

ms

Delay time for band gap reference to be stable. Bits 7 and 6 of the ADCTRL3 register

(ADCBGRFDN1/0) must be set to 1 before the PWDNADC bit is enabled.

t_d(BGR)

5

Delay time for power-down control to be stable. Bit delay time for band-gap reference

to be stable. Bits 7 and 6 of the ADCTRL3 register (ADCBGRFDN1/0) must be set to

1 before the PWDNADC bit is enabled. Bit 5 of the ADCTRL3 register

20

50

μs

t_d(PWD)

1

ms

(PWDNADC)must be set to 1 before any ADC conversions are initiated.

(1) Timings maintain compatibility to the 281x ADC module. The 280x ADC also supports driving all 3 bits at the same time and waiting

t_d(BGR)ms before first conversion.

8.15.2.2 Current Consumption for Different ADC Configurations (at 12.5-MHz ADCCLK)

ADC OPERATING MODE⁽¹⁾

CONDITIONS

BG and REF enabled

V_DDA18

V_DDA3.3

UNIT

(2)

•

Mode A (Operational Mode):

30

2

mA

PWD disabled

•

ADC clock enabled

BG and REF enabled

PWD enabled

Mode B:

Mode C:

Mode D:

9

5

0.5

20

15

mA

μA

•

ADC clock enabled

BG and REF disabled

PWD enabled

•

ADC clock disabled

BG and REF disabled

PWD enabled

(1) Test Conditions:

SYSCLKOUT = 100 MHz

ADC module clock = 12.5 MHz

ADC performing a continuous conversion of all 16 channels in Mode A

(2) V_DDA18includes current into V_DD1A18and V_DD2A18. V_DDA3.3includes current into V_DDA2and V_DDAIO

.

Submit Document Feedback

61

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

R

on

Switch

R

s

ADCIN0

1 kΩ

C

h

p

Source

Signal

ac

10 pF

1.64 pF

28x DSP

Typical Values of the Input Circuit Components:

Switch Resistance (R ):

on

Sampling Capacitor (C ):

1 kΩ

1.64 pF

h

Parasitic Capacitance (C ): 10 pF

p

Source Resistance (R ):

s

50 Ω

Figure 8-24. ADC Analog Input Impedance Model

8.15.3 Definitions

Reference Voltage

The on-chip ADC has a built-in reference, which provides the reference voltages for the ADC.

Analog Inputs

The on-chip ADC consists of 16 analog inputs, which are sampled either one at a time or two channels at a time.

These inputs are software-selectable.

Converter

The on-chip ADC uses a 12-bit four-stage pipeline architecture, which achieves a high sample rate with low

power consumption.

Conversion Modes

The conversion can be performed in two different conversion modes:

•

Sequential sampling mode (SMODE = 0)

Simultaneous sampling mode (SMODE = 1)

62

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.15.4 Sequential Sampling Mode (Single-Channel) (SMODE = 0)

In sequential sampling mode, the ADC can continuously convert input signals on any of the channels (Ax to Bx).

The ADC can start conversions on event triggers from the ePWM, software trigger, or from an external ADCSOC

signal. If the SMODE bit is 0, the ADC will do conversions on the selected channel on every Sample/Hold pulse.

The conversion time and latency of the Result register update are explained below. The ADC interrupt flags are

set a few SYSCLKOUT cycles after the Result register update. The selected channels will be sampled at every

falling edge of the Sample/Hold pulse. The Sample/Hold pulse width can be programmed to be 1 ADC clock

wide (minimum) or 16 ADC clocks wide (maximum).

Sample n+2

Sample n+1

Analog Input on

Sample n

Channel Ax or Bx

ADC Clock

Sample and Hold

SH Pulse

SMODE Bit

t

d(SH)

t

dschx_n+1

t

dschx_n

ADC Event Trigger from

ePWM or Other Sources

t

SH

Figure 8-25. Sequential Sampling Mode (Single-Channel) Timing

8.15.4.1 Sequential Sampling Mode Timing

AT 12.5 MHz

ADC CLOCK,

SAMPLE n

SAMPLE n + 1

REMARKS

t_c(ADCCLK)= 80 ns

Delay time from event trigger to

sampling

t_d(SH)

2.5t_c(ADCCLK)

Sample/Hold width/Acquisition

Width

(1 + Acqps) *

t_c(ADCCLK)

Acqps value = 0–15

ADCTRL1[8:11]

t_SH

80 ns with Acqps = 0

320 ns

Delay time for first result to appear

in Result register

t_{d(schx_n)}

t_{d(schx_n+1)}

4t_c(ADCCLK)

Delay time for successive results to

appear in Result register

(2 + Acqps) *

t_c(ADCCLK)

160 ns

Submit Document Feedback

63

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.15.5 Simultaneous Sampling Mode (Dual-Channel) (SMODE = 1)

In simultaneous mode, the ADC can continuously convert input signals on any one pair of channels (A0/B0 to

A7/B7). The ADC can start conversions on event triggers from the ePWM, software trigger, or from an external

ADCSOC signal. If the SMODE bit is 1, the ADC will do conversions on two selected channels on every Sample/

Hold pulse. The conversion time and latency of the result register update are explained below. The ADC interrupt

flags are set a few SYSCLKOUT cycles after the Result register update. The selected channels will be sampled

simultaneously at the falling edge of the Sample/Hold pulse. The Sample/Hold pulse width can be programmed

to be 1 ADC clock wide (minimum) or 16 ADC clocks wide (maximum).

Note

In simultaneous mode, the ADCIN channel pair select has to be A0/B0, A1/B1, ..., A7/B7, and not in

other combinations (such as A1/B3, and so forth).

Sample n

Sample n+2

Sample n+1

Analog Input on

Channel Ax

Analog Input on

Channel Bx

ADC Clock

Sample and Hold

SH Pulse

SMODE Bit

t

d(SH)

t

dschA0_n+1

t

SH

ADC Event Trigger from

ePWM or Other Sources

t

dschA0_n

dschB0_n+1

t

dschB0_n

Figure 8-26. Simultaneous Sampling Mode Timing

8.15.5.1 Simultaneous Sampling Mode Timing

AT 12.5 MHz

ADC CLOCK,

SAMPLE n

SAMPLE n + 1

REMARKS

t_c(ADCCLK)= 80 ns

Delay time from event trigger to

sampling

t_d(SH)

2.5t_c(ADCCLK)

Sample/Hold width/Acquisition

Width

(1 + Acqps) *

t_c(ADCCLK)

Acqps value = 0–15

ADCTRL1[8:11]

t_SH

80 ns with Acqps = 0

320 ns

Delay time for first result to

appear in Result register

t_{d(schA0_n)}

t_{d(schB0_n )}

t_{d(schA0_n+1)}

t_{d(schB0_n+1 )}

4t_c(ADCCLK)

5t_c(ADCCLK)

Delay time for first result to

appear in Result register

400 ns

Delay time for successive results

to appear in Result register

(3 + Acqps) * t_c(ADCCLK)

240 ns

Delay time for successive results

to appear in Result register

240 ns

8.15.6 Detailed Descriptions

Integral Nonlinearity

Integral nonlinearity refers to the deviation of each individual code from a line drawn from zero through full scale.

The point used as zero occurs one-half LSB before the first code transition. The full-scale point is defined as

64

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

level one-half LSB beyond the last code transition. The deviation is measured from the center of each particular

code to the true straight line between these two points.

Differential Nonlinearity

An ideal ADC exhibits code transitions that are exactly 1 LSB apart. DNL is the deviation from this ideal value. A

differential nonlinearity error of less than ±1 LSB ensures no missing codes.

Zero Offset

The major carry transition should occur when the analog input is at zero volts. Zero error is defined as the

deviation of the actual transition from that point.

Gain Error

The first code transition should occur at an analog value one-half LSB above negative full scale. The last

transition should occur at an analog value one and one-half LSB below the nominal full scale. Gain error is the

deviation of the actual difference between first and last code transitions and the ideal difference between first

and last code transitions.

Signal-to-Noise Ratio + Distortion (SINAD)

SINAD is the ratio of the rms value of the measured input signal to the rms sum of all other spectral components

below the Nyquist frequency, including harmonics but excluding dc. The value for SINAD is expressed in

decibels.

Effective Number of Bits (ENOB)

For a sine wave, SINAD can be expressed in terms of the number of bits. Using the following formula,

(

)

SINAD * 1.76

N +

6.02

it is possible to get a measure of performance expressed as N, the effective number of

bits. Thus, effective number of bits for a device for sine wave inputs at a given input frequency can be calculated

directly from its measured SINAD.

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)

THD is the ratio of the rms sum of the first nine harmonic components to the rms value of the measured input

signal and is expressed as a percentage or in decibels.

Spurious Free Dynamic Range (SFDR)

SFDR is the difference in dB between the rms amplitude of the input signal and the peak spurious signal.

Submit Document Feedback

65

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.16 Migrating From F280x Devices to C280x Devices

8.16.1 Migration Issues

The migration issues to be considered while migrating from the F280x devices to C280x devices are as follows:

•

The 1K OTP memory available in F280x devices has been replaced by 1K ROM C280x devices.

Current consumption differs for F280x and C280x devices for all four possible modes. See the appropriate

electrical section for exact numbers.

•

The V_DD3VFLpin is the 3.3-V Flash core power pin in F280x devices but is a V_DDIOpin in C280x devices.

F280x and C280x devices are pin-compatible and code-compatible; however, they are electrically different

with different EMI/ESD profiles. Before ramping production with C280x devices, evaluate performance of the

hardware design with both devices.

•

Addresses 0x3D 7BFC through 0x3D 7BFF in the OTP and addresses 0x3F 7FF0 through 0x3F 7FF5 in the

main ROM array are reserved for ROM part-specific information and are not available for user applications.

The paged and random wait-state specifications for the Flash and ROM parts are different. While migrating

from Flash to ROM parts, the same wait-state values must be used for best-performance compatibility (for

example, in applications that use software delay loops or where precise interrupt latencies are critical).

The analog input switch resistance is smaller in C280x devices compared to F280x devices. While migrating

from a Flash to a ROM device care should be taken to design the analog input circuits to meet the application

performance required by the sampling network.

•

The PART-ID register value is different for Flash and ROM parts.

From a silicon functionality/errata standpoint, rev A ROM devices are equivalent to rev C flash devices. See

the errata applicable to 280x devices for details.

•

As part of the ROM code generation process, all unused memory locations in the customer application are

automatically filled with 0xFFFF. Unused locations should not be manually filled with any other data.

Note

Requests for ROM versions of the F280x device are not accepted by TI anymore.

For errata applicable to 280x devices, see the TMS320F280x, TMS320C280x, TMS320F2801x DSPs silicon

errata.

66

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

8.17 ROM Timing (C280x only)

8.17.1 ROM/OTP Access Timing

PARAMETER

MIN

19

MAX

UNIT

ns

t_a(rp)

Paged ROM access time

t_a(rr)

Random ROM access time

19

ns

t_a(ROM)

ROM (OTP area) access time ⁽¹⁾

60

ns

(1) In C280x devices, a 1K X 16 ROM block replaces the OTP block found in Flash devices.

Table 8-3. ROM/ROM (OTP area) Minimum Required

Wait-States at Different Frequencies

SYSCLKOUT

(MHz)

SYSCLKOUT

(ns)

PAGE WAIT- RANDOM WAIT-

STATE

STATE⁽¹⁾

100

75

50

30

25

15

4

10

13.33

20

1

0

1

33.33

40

66.67

250

(1) Random wait-state must be greater than or equal to 1.

Equations to compute the page wait-state and random wait-state in Table 8-3 are as follows:

t_a(rp)

+

ǒ Ǔ* 1

ROM Page Wait-State ƪ ƫ(round up to the next highest integer) or 0, whichever is larger

t_c(SCO)

t_a(rr)

+

ǒ Ǔ* 1

ƪ ƫ_{(round up to the next highest integer) or 1, whichever is larger}

ROM Random Wait-State

t_c(SCO)

Submit Document Feedback

67

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9 Detailed Description

9.1 Brief Descriptions

9.1.1 C28x CPU

The C28x DSP generation is the newest member of the TMS320C2000^™DSP platform. The C28x is a very

efficient C/C++ engine, enabling users to develop not only their system control software in a high-level language,

but also enables math algorithms to be developed using C/C++. The C28x is as efficient in DSP math tasks as it

is in system control tasks that typically are handled by microcontroller devices. This efficiency removes the need

for a second processor in many systems. The 32 x 32-bit MAC capabilities of the C28x and its 64-bit processing

capabilities, enable the C28x to efficiently handle higher numerical resolution problems that would otherwise

demand a more expensive floating-point processor solution. Add to this the fast interrupt response with

automatic context save of critical registers, resulting in a device that is capable of servicing many asynchronous

events with minimal latency. The C28x has an 8-level-deep protected pipeline with pipelined memory accesses.

This pipelining enables the C28x to execute at high speeds without resorting to expensive high-speed memories.

Special branch-look-ahead hardware minimizes the latency for conditional discontinuities. Special store

conditional operations further improve performance.

9.1.2 Memory Bus (Harvard Bus Architecture)

As with many DSP type devices, multiple busses are used to move data between the memories and peripherals

and the CPU. The C28x memory bus architecture contains a program read bus, data read bus and data write

bus. The program read bus consists of 22 address lines and 32 data lines. The data read and write busses

consist of 32 address lines and 32 data lines each. The 32-bit-wide data busses enable single cycle 32-bit

operations. The multiple bus architecture, commonly termed Harvard Bus, enables the C28x to fetch an

instruction, read a data value and write a data value in a single cycle. All peripherals and memories attached to

the memory bus will prioritize memory accesses. Generally, the priority of memory bus accesses can be

summarized as follows:

Highest:

Data Writes

Program Writes

Data Reads

Program Reads

Fetches

(Simultaneous data and program writes cannot occur on the memory bus.)

(Simultaneous program reads and fetches cannot occur on the memory bus.)

Lowest:

9.1.3 Peripheral Bus

To enable migration of peripherals between various Texas Instruments (TI) DSP family of devices, the 280x

devices adopt a peripheral bus standard for peripheral interconnect. The peripheral bus bridge multiplexes the

various busses that make up the processor Memory Bus into a single bus consisting of 16 address lines and 16

or 32 data lines and associated control signals. Two versions of the peripheral bus are supported on the 280x.

One version only supports 16-bit accesses (called peripheral frame 2). The other version supports both 16- and

32-bit accesses (called peripheral frame 1).

68

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.1.4 Real-Time JTAG and Analysis

The 280x implements the standard IEEE 1149.1 JTAG interface. Additionally, the 280x supports real-time mode

of operation whereby the contents of memory, peripheral and register locations can be modified while the

processor is running and executing code and servicing interrupts. The user can also single step through non-

time critical code while enabling time-critical interrupts to be serviced without interference. The 280x implements

the real-time mode in hardware within the CPU. This is a unique feature to the 280x, no software monitor is

required. Additionally, special analysis hardware is provided which allows the user to set hardware breakpoint or

data/address watch-points and generate various user-selectable break events when a match occurs.

9.1.5 Flash

The F2809 contains 128K x 16 of embedded flash memory, segregated into eight 16K x 16 sectors. The F2808

contains 64K x 16 of embedded flash memory, segregated into four 16K x 16 sectors. The F2806 and F2802

have 32K x 16 of embedded flash, segregated into four 8K x 16 sectors. The F2801 device contains 16K x 16 of

embedded flash, segregated into four 4K x 16 sectors. All five devices also contain a single 1K x 16 of OTP

memory at address range 0x3D 7800 – 0x3D 7BFF. The user can individually erase, program, and validate a

flash sector while leaving other sectors untouched. However, it is not possible to use one sector of the flash or

the OTP to execute flash algorithms that erase/program other sectors. Special memory pipelining is provided to

enable the flash module to achieve higher performance. The flash/OTP is mapped to both program and data

space; therefore, it can be used to execute code or store data information. Note that addresses 0x3F7FF0 –

0x3F7FF5 are reserved for data variables and should not contain program code.

Note

The F2809/F2808/F2806/F2802/F2801 Flash and OTP wait-states can be configured by the

application. This allows applications running at slower frequencies to configure the flash to use fewer

wait-states.

Flash effective performance can be improved by enabling the flash pipeline mode in the Flash options

register. With this mode enabled, effective performance of linear code execution will be much faster

than the raw performance indicated by the wait-state configuration alone. The exact performance gain

when using the Flash pipeline mode is application-dependent.

For more information on the Flash options, Flash wait-state, and OTP wait-state registers, see the

TMS320x280x, 2801x, 2804x DSP system control and interrupts reference guide.

9.1.6 ROM

The C2802 contains 32K x 16 of ROM, while the C2801 contains 16K x 16 of ROM.

Note

Requests for ROM devices are not accepted by TI anymore.

9.1.7 M0, M1 SARAMs

All 280x devices contain these two blocks of single-access memory, each 1K x 16 in size. The stack pointer

points to the beginning of block M1 on reset. The M0 and M1 blocks, like all other memory blocks on C28x

devices, are mapped to both program and data space. Hence, the user can use M0 and M1 to execute code or

for data variables. The partitioning is performed within the linker. The C28x device presents a unified memory

map to the programmer. This makes for easier programming in high-level languages.

Submit Document Feedback

69

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.1.8 L0, L1, H0 SARAMs

The F2809 and F2808 each contain an additional 16K x 16 of single-access RAM, divided into three blocks

(L0-4K, L1-4K, H0-8K). The F2806 contains an additional 8K x 16 of single-access RAM, divided into two blocks

(L0-4K, L1-4K). The F2802, F2801, C2802, and C2801 each contain an additional 4K x 16 of single-access RAM

(L0-4K). Each block can be independently accessed to minimize CPU pipeline stalls. Each block is mapped to

both program and data space.

9.1.9 Boot ROM

The Boot ROM is factory-programmed with boot-loading software. Boot-mode signals are provided to tell the

bootloader software what boot mode to use on power up. The user can select to boot normally or to download

new software from an external connection or to select boot software that is programmed in the internal Flash/

ROM. The Boot ROM also contains standard tables, such as SIN/COS waveforms, for use in math related

algorithms.

Table 9-1. Boot Mode Selection

GPIO18

GPIO29

MODE

DESCRIPTION

SPICLKA

SCITXDB

GPIO34

SCITXDA

Jump to Flash/ROM address 0x3F 7FF6

Boot to Flash/ROM

You must have programmed a branch instruction here prior

to reset to redirect code execution as desired.

1

SCI-A Boot

SPI-A Boot

Load a data stream from SCI-A

1

0

1

Load from an external serial SPI EEPROM on SPI-A

Load data from an external EEPROM at address 0x50 on

the I2C bus

I2C Boot

1

0

eCAN-A Boot

Call CAN_Boot to load from eCAN-A mailbox 1.

Jump to M0 SARAM address 0x00 0000.

Jump to OTP address 0x3D 7800

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

Boot to M0 SARAM

Boot to OTP

Parallel I/O Boot

Load data from GPIO0 - GPIO15

70

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.1.10 Security

The 280x devices support high levels of security to protect the user firmware from being reverse engineered.

The security features a 128-bit password (hardcoded for 16 wait-states), which the user programs into the flash.

One code security module (CSM) is used to protect the flash/OTP and the L0/L1 SARAM blocks. The security

feature prevents unauthorized users from examining the memory contents via the JTAG port, executing code

from external memory or trying to boot-load some undesirable software that would export the secure memory

contents. To enable access to the secure blocks, the user must write the correct 128-bit KEY value, which

matches the value stored in the password locations within the Flash.

Note

The 128-bit password (at 0x3F 7FF8 – 0x3F 7FFF) must not be programmed to zeros. Doing so would

permanently lock the device.

Note

Code Security Module Disclaimer

THE CODE SECURITY MODULE (CSM) INCLUDED ON THIS DEVICE WAS DESIGNED TO

PASSWORD PROTECT THE DATA STORED IN THE ASSOCIATED MEMORY (EITHER ROM OR

FLASH) AND IS WARRANTED BY TEXAS INSTRUMENTS (TI), IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITS

STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS, TO CONFORM TO TI'S PUBLISHED SPECIFICATIONS

FOR THE WARRANTY PERIOD APPLICABLE FOR THIS DEVICE.

TI DOES NOT, HOWEVER, WARRANT OR REPRESENT THAT THE CSM CANNOT BE

COMPROMISED OR BREACHED OR THAT THE DATA STORED IN THE ASSOCIATED MEMORY

CANNOT BE ACCESSED THROUGH OTHER MEANS. MOREOVER, EXCEPT AS SET FORTH

ABOVE, TI MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS CONCERNING THE CSM OR

OPERATION OF THIS DEVICE, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

IN NO EVENT SHALL TI BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT,

INCIDENTAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED, ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF

YOUR USE OF THE CSM OR THIS DEVICE, WHETHER OR NOT TI HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. EXCLUDED DAMAGES INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED

TO LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF GOODWILL, LOSS OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR

OTHER ECONOMIC LOSS.

Submit Document Feedback

71

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.1.11 Peripheral Interrupt Expansion (PIE) Block

The PIE block serves to multiplex numerous interrupt sources into a smaller set of interrupt inputs. The PIE block

can support up to 96 peripheral interrupts. On the 280x, 43 of the possible 96 interrupts are used by peripherals.

The 96 interrupts are grouped into blocks of 8 and each group is fed into 1 of 12 CPU interrupt lines (INT1 to

INT12). Each of the 96 interrupts is supported by its own vector stored in a dedicated RAM block that can be

overwritten by the user. The vector is automatically fetched by the CPU on servicing the interrupt. It takes 8 CPU

clock cycles to fetch the vector and save critical CPU registers. Hence the CPU can quickly respond to interrupt

events. Prioritization of interrupts is controlled in hardware and software. Each individual interrupt can be

enabled/disabled within the PIE block.

9.1.12 External Interrupts (XINT1, XINT2, XNMI)

The 280x supports three masked external interrupts (XINT1, XINT2, XNMI). XNMI can be connected to the

INT13 or NMI interrupt of the CPU. Each of the interrupts can be selected for negative, positive, or both negative

and positive edge triggering and can also be enabled/disabled (including the XNMI). The masked interrupts also

contain a 16-bit free running up counter, which is reset to zero when a valid interrupt edge is detected. This

counter can be used to accurately time stamp the interrupt. Unlike the 281x devices, there are no dedicated pins

for the external interrupts. Rather, any Port A GPIO pin can be configured to trigger any external interrupt.

9.1.13 Oscillator and PLL

The 280x can be clocked by an external oscillator or by a crystal attached to the on-chip oscillator circuit. A PLL

is provided supporting up to 10 input-clock-scaling ratios. The PLL ratios can be changed on-the-fly in software,

enabling the user to scale back on operating frequency if lower power operation is desired. See Section 8 for

timing details. The PLL block can be set in bypass mode.

9.1.14 Watchdog

The 280x devices contain a watchdog timer. The user software must regularly reset the watchdog counter within

a certain time frame; otherwise, the watchdog will generate a reset to the processor. The watchdog can be

disabled if necessary.

9.1.15 Peripheral Clocking

The clocks to each individual peripheral can be enabled/disabled so as to reduce power consumption when a

peripheral is not in use. Additionally, the system clock to the serial ports (except I2C and eCAN) and the ADC

blocks can be scaled relative to the CPU clock. This enables the timing of peripherals to be decoupled from

increasing CPU clock speeds.

9.1.16 Low-Power Modes

The 280x devices are full static CMOS devices. Three low-power modes are provided:

IDLE:

Place CPU into low-power mode. Peripheral clocks may be turned off selectively and only those peripherals that

need to function during IDLE are left operating. An enabled interrupt from an active peripheral or the watchdog

timer will wake the processor from IDLE mode.

STANDBY:

HALT:

Turns off clock to CPU and peripherals. This mode leaves the oscillator and PLL functional. An external interrupt

event will wake the processor and the peripherals. Execution begins on the next valid cycle after detection of the

interrupt event

Turns off the internal oscillator. This mode basically shuts down the device and places it in the lowest possible

power consumption mode. A reset or external signal can wake the device from this mode.

72

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.1.17 Peripheral Frames 0, 1, 2 (PFn)

The 280x segregate peripherals into three sections. The mapping of peripherals is as follows:

PF0:

PF1:

PF2:

PIE:

PIE Interrupt Enable and Control Registers Plus PIE Vector Table

Flash Control, Programming, Erase, Verify Registers

CPU-Timers 0, 1, 2 Registers

Flash:

Timers:

CSM:

ADC:

eCAN:

GPIO:

ePWM:

eCAP:

eQEP:

SYS:

Code Security Module KEY Registers

ADC Result Registers (dual-mapped)

eCAN Mailbox and Control Registers

GPIO MUX Configuration and Control Registers

Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator Module and Registers

Enhanced Capture Module and Registers

Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse Module and Registers

System Control Registers

SCI:

Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Control and RX/TX Registers

Serial Port Interface (SPI) Control and RX/TX Registers

ADC Status, Control, and Result Register

SPI:

ADC:

I2C:

Inter-Integrated Circuit Module and Registers

9.1.18 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Multiplexer

Most of the peripheral signals are multiplexed with general-purpose input/output (GPIO) signals. This enables

the user to use a pin as GPIO if the peripheral signal or function is not used. On reset, GPIO pins are configured

as inputs. The user can individually program each pin for GPIO mode or peripheral signal mode. For specific

inputs, the user can also select the number of input qualification cycles. This is to filter unwanted noise glitches.

The GPIO signals can also be used to bring the device out of specific low-power modes.

9.1.19 32-Bit CPU-Timers (0, 1, 2)

CPU-Timers 0, 1, and 2 are identical 32-bit timers with presettable periods and with 16-bit clock prescaling. The

timers have a 32-bit count-down register, which generates an interrupt when the counter reaches zero. The

counter is decremented at the CPU clock speed divided by the prescale value setting. When the counter reaches

zero, it is automatically reloaded with a 32-bit period value. CPU-Timer 2 is reserved for the SYS/BIOS Real-

Time OS, and is connected to INT14 of the CPU. If SYS/BIOS is not being used, CPU-Timer 2 is available for

general use. CPU-Timer 1 is for general use and can be connected to INT13 of the CPU. CPU-Timer 0 is also for

general use and is connected to the PIE block.

Submit Document Feedback

73

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.1.20 Control Peripherals

The 280x devices support the following peripherals which are used for embedded control and communication:

ePWM:

eCAP:

eQEP:

The enhanced PWM peripheral supports independent/complementary PWM generation, adjustable dead-band

generation for leading/trailing edges, latched/cycle-by-cycle trip mechanism. Some of the PWM pins support

HRPWM features.

The enhanced capture peripheral uses a 32-bit time base and registers up to four programmable events in

continuous/one-shot capture modes.

This peripheral can also be configured to generate an auxiliary PWM signal.

The enhanced QEP peripheral uses a 32-bit position counter, supports low-speed measurement using capture

unit and high-speed measurement using a 32-bit unit timer.

This peripheral has a watchdog timer to detect motor stall and input error detection logic to identify simultaneous

edge transition in QEP signals.

ADC:

The ADC block is a 12-bit converter, single-ended, 16-channels. It contains two sample-and-hold units for

simultaneous sampling.

9.1.21 Serial Port Peripherals

The 280x devices support the following serial communication peripherals:

eCAN:

This is the enhanced version of the CAN peripheral. It supports 32 mailboxes, time stamping of messages, and is

compliant with ISO11898-1 (CAN 2.0B).

SPI:

The SPI is a high-speed, synchronous serial I/O port that allows a serial bit stream of programmed length (one to

sixteen bits) to be shifted into and out of the device at a programmable bit-transfer rate. Normally, the SPI is used

for communications between the DSP controller and external peripherals or another processor. Typical

applications include external I/O or peripheral expansion through devices such as shift registers, display drivers,

and ADCs. Multi-device communications are supported by the master/slave operation of the SPI. On the 280x,

the SPI contains a 16-level receive and transmit FIFO for reducing interrupt servicing overhead.

SCI:

I2C:

The serial communications interface is a two-wire asynchronous serial port, commonly known as UART. On the

280x, the SCI contains a 16-level receive and transmit FIFO for reducing interrupt servicing overhead.

The inter-integrated circuit (I2C) module provides an interface between a DSP and other devices compliant with

Philips Semiconductors Inter-IC bus (I2C-bus) specification version 2.1 and connected by way of an I2C-bus.

External components attached to this 2-wire serial bus can transmit/receive up to 8-bit data to/from the DSP

through the I2C module. On the 280x, the I2C contains a 16-level receive and transmit FIFO for reducing

interrupt servicing overhead.

74

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.2 Peripherals

The integrated peripherals of the 280x are described in the following subsections:

•

Three 32-bit CPU-Timers

Up to six enhanced PWM modules (ePWM1, ePWM2, ePWM3, ePWM4, ePWM5, ePWM6)

Up to four enhanced capture modules (eCAP1, eCAP2, eCAP3, eCAP4)

Up to two enhanced QEP modules (eQEP1, eQEP2)

Enhanced analog-to-digital converter (ADC) module

Up to two enhanced controller area network (eCAN) modules (eCAN-A, eCAN-B)

Up to two serial communications interface modules (SCI-A, SCI-B)

Up to four serial peripheral interface (SPI) modules (SPI-A, SPI-B, SPI-C, SPI-D)

Inter-integrated circuit module (I2C)

Digital I/O and shared pin functions

9.2.1 32-Bit CPU-Timers 0/1/2

There are three 32-bit CPU-timers on the 280x devices (CPU-TIMER0/1/2).

CPU-Timer 0 and CPU-Timer 1 can be used in user applications. Timer 2 is reserved for SYS/BIOS. These

timers are different from the timers that are present in the ePWM modules.

Note

If the application is not using SYS/BIOS, then CPU-Timer 2 can be used in the application.

Reset

Timer Reload

16-Bit Timer Divide-Down

32-Bit Timer Period

TDDRH:TDDR

PRDH:PRD

16-Bit Prescale Counter

PSCH:PSC

SYSCLKOUT

TCR.4

(Timer Start Status)

32-Bit Counter

TIMH:TIM

Borrow

TINT

Figure 9-1. CPU-Timers

Submit Document Feedback

75

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

In the 280x devices, the timer interrupt signals ( TINT0, TINT1, TINT2) are connected as shown in Figure 9-2.

INT1

to

INT12

TINT0

PIE

CPU-TIMER 0

C28x

TINT1

INT13

INT14

CPU-TIMER 1

XINT13

CPU-TIMER 2

(Reserved for

SYS/BIOS)

TINT2

A. The timer registers are connected to the memory bus of the C28x processor.

B. The timing of the timers is synchronized to SYSCLKOUT of the processor clock.

Figure 9-2. CPU-Timer Interrupt Signals and Output Signal

The general operation of the timer is as follows: The 32-bit counter register "TIMH:TIM" is loaded with the value

in the period register "PRDH:PRD". The counter register decrements at the SYSCLKOUT rate of the C28x.

When the counter reaches 0, a timer interrupt output signal generates an interrupt pulse. The registers listed in

Table 9-2 are used to configure the timers. For more information, see the TMS320x280x, 2801x, 2804x DSP

system control and interrupts reference guide.

Table 9-2. CPU-Timers 0, 1, 2 Configuration and Control Registers

NAME

TIMER0TIM

ADDRESS

0x0C00

0x0C01

0x0C02

0x0C03

0x0C04

0x0C05

0x0C06

0x0C07

0x0C08

0x0C09

0x0C0A

0x0C0B

0x0C0C

0x0C0D

0x0C0E

0x0C0F

0x0C10

0x0C11

0x0C12

0x0C13

0x0C14

0x0C15

0x0C16

SIZE (x16)

DESCRIPTION

1

CPU-Timer 0, Counter Register

TIMER0TIMH

TIMER0PRD

TIMER0PRDH

TIMER0TCR

Reserved

CPU-Timer 0, Counter Register High

CPU-Timer 0, Period Register

CPU-Timer 0, Period Register High

CPU-Timer 0, Control Register

Reserved

TIMER0TPR

TIMER0TPRH

TIMER1TIM

TIMER1TIMH

TIMER1PRD

TIMER1PRDH

TIMER1TCR

Reserved

CPU-Timer 0, Prescale Register

CPU-Timer 0, Prescale Register High

CPU-Timer 1, Counter Register

CPU-Timer 1, Counter Register High

CPU-Timer 1, Period Register

CPU-Timer 1, Period Register High

CPU-Timer 1, Control Register

Reserved

TIMER1TPR

TIMER1TPRH

TIMER2TIM

TIMER2TIMH

TIMER2PRD

TIMER2PRDH

TIMER2TCR

Reserved

CPU-Timer 1, Prescale Register

CPU-Timer 1, Prescale Register High

CPU-Timer 2, Counter Register

CPU-Timer 2, Counter Register High

CPU-Timer 2, Period Register

CPU-Timer 2, Period Register High

CPU-Timer 2, Control Register

Reserved

TIMER2TPR

CPU-Timer 2, Prescale Register

76

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Table 9-2. CPU-Timers 0, 1, 2 Configuration and Control Registers (continued)

NAME

ADDRESS

SIZE (x16)

DESCRIPTION

TIMER2TPRH

Reserved

0x0C17

1

CPU-Timer 2, Prescale Register High

0x0C18 –

0x0C3F

40

Reserved

9.2.2 Enhanced PWM Modules (ePWM1/2/3/4/5/6)

The 280x device contains up to six enhanced PWM modules (ePWM). Figure 9-3 shows a block diagram of

multiple ePWM modules. Figure 9-4 shows the signal interconnections with the ePWM. See the TMS320x280x,

2801x, 2804x Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM) module reference guide for more details.

EPWM1SYNCI

EPWM1INT

EPWM1A

EPWM1SOC

ePWM1 Module

EPWM1B

TZ1 to TZ6

EPWM1SYNCO

EPWM2SYNCI

To eCAP1

Module

(Sync in)

EPWM1SYNCO

EPWM2INT

EPWM2A

EPWM2SOC

PIE

ePWM2 Module

EPWM2SYNCO

EPWM2B

GPIO

MUX

TZ1 to TZ6

EPWMxSYNCI

ePWMx Module

EPWMxSYNCO

EPWMxINT

EPWMxA

EPWMxSOC

EPWMxB

TZ1 to TZ6

ADCSOCx0

Peripheral Bus

ADC

Figure 9-3. Multiple PWM Modules in a 280x System

Table 9-3 shows the complete ePWM register set per module.

Table 9-3. ePWM Control and Status Registers

SIZE (x16) /

#SHADOW

NAME

ePWM1 ePWM2 ePWM3 ePWM4

0x6800 0x6840 0x6880 0x68C0

ePWM5

ePWM6

DESCRIPTION

TBCTL

0x6900

0x6940

1 / 0

Time Base Control Register

Submit Document Feedback

77

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Table 9-3. ePWM Control and Status Registers (continued)

SIZE (x16) /

#SHADOW

NAME

ePWM1 ePWM2 ePWM3 ePWM4

ePWM5

0x6901

N/A

ePWM6

0x6941

N/A

DESCRIPTION

TBSTS

0x6801

0x6802

0x6841

0x6842

0x6881

0x6882

0x68C1

0x68C2

1 / 0

Time Base Status Register

TBPHSH

R

1 / 0

Time Base Phase HRPWM Register

TBPHS

TBCTR

TBPRD

CMPCTL

0x6803

0x6804

0x6805

0x6807

0x6843

0x6844

0x6845

0x6847

0x6848

0x6849

0x684A

0x6883

0x6884

0x6885

0x6887

0x6888

0x6889

0x688A

0x68C3

0x68C4

0x68C5

0x68C7

0x68C8

0x68C9

0x68CA

0x6903

0x6904

0x6905

0x6907

N/A

0x6943

0x6944

0x6945

0x6947

N/A

1 / 0

1 / 1

1 / 0

1 / 1

Time Base Phase Register

Time Base Counter Register

Time Base Period Register Set

Counter Compare Control Register

Time Base Compare A HRPWM Register

Counter Compare A Register Set

Counter Compare B Register Set

CMPAHR 0x6808

CMPA

CMPB

0x6809

0x680A

0x6909

0x690A

0x6949

0x694A

Action Qualifier Control Register For

Output A

AQCTLA

AQCTLB

0x680B

0x680C

0x684B

0x688B

0x68CB

0x690B

0x694B

1 / 0

Action Qualifier Control Register For

Output B

0x684C

0x684D

0x684E

0x684F

0x6850

0x688C 0x68CC

0x688D 0x68CD

0x690C

0x690D

0x690E

0x690F

0x6910

0x694C

0x694D

0x694E

0x694F

0x6950

1 / 0

1 / 1

1 / 0

AQSFRC 0x680D

Action Qualifier Software Force Register

AQCSFR

0x680E

C

Action Qualifier Continuous S/W Force

Register Set

0x688E

0x688F

0x6890

0x68CE

0x68CF

0x68D0

DBCTL

DBRED

0x680F

0x6810

Dead-Band Generator Control Register

Dead-Band Generator Rising Edge Delay

Count Register

Dead-Band Generator Falling Edge Delay

Count Register

DBFED

0x6811

0x6851

0x6891

0x68D1

0x6911

0x6951

1 / 0

TZSEL

TZCTL

TZEINT

TZFLG

TZCLR

TZFRC

ETSEL

ETPS

0x6812

0x6814

0x6815

0x6816

0x6817

0x6818

0x6819

0x681A

0x681B

0x681C

0x681D

0x681E

0x6852

0x6854

0x6855

0x6856

0x6857

0x6858

0x6859

0x685A

0x685B

0x685C

0x685D

0x685E

0x6860

0x6892

0x6894

0x6895

0x6896

0x6897

0x6898

0x6899

0x689A

0x689B

0x68D2

0x68D4

0x68D5

0x68D6

0x68D7

0x68D8

0x68D9

0x68DA

0x68DB

0x6912

0x6914

0x6915

0x6916

0x6917

0x6918

0x6919

0x691A

0x691B

0x691C

0x691D

0x691E

0x6952

0x6954

0x6955

0x6956

0x6957

0x6958

0x6959

0x695A

0x695B

0x695C

0x695D

0x695E

1 / 0

Trip Zone Select Register⁽¹⁾

Trip Zone Control Register⁽¹⁾

Trip Zone Enable Interrupt Register⁽¹⁾

Trip Zone Flag Register

Trip Zone Clear Register⁽¹⁾

Trip Zone Force Register⁽¹⁾

Event Trigger Selection Register

Event Trigger Prescale Register

Event Trigger Flag Register

Event Trigger Clear Register

Event Trigger Force Register

PWM Chopper Control Register

HRPWM Configuration Register⁽¹⁾

ETFLG

ETCLR

ETFRC

PCCTL

0x689C 0x68DC

0x689D 0x68DD

0x689E

0x68A0

0x68DE

0x68E0

HRCNFG 0x6820

0x6920⁽²⁾0x6960⁽²⁾

(1) Registers that are EALLOW protected.

(2) Applicable to F2809 only

78

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Time-Base (TB)

Sync

CTR = ZERO

CTR = CMPB

Disabled

In/Out

Select

Mux

TBPRD Shadow (16)

TBPRD Active (16)

EPWMxSYNCO

CTR = PRD

TBCTL[SYNCOSEL]

TBCTL[PHSEN]

EPWMxSYNCI

Counter

Up/Down

(16-Bit)

TBCTL[SWFSYNC]

(Software-Forced Sync)

CTR = ZERO

CTR_Dir

TBCNT

Active (16)

TBPHSHR (8)

16

8

CTR = PRD

CTR = ZERO

CTR = CMPA

CTR = CMPB

CTR_Dir

Phase

Control

Event

Trigger

and

Interrupt

(ET)

EPWMxINT

TBPHS Active (24)

EPWMxSOCA

EPWMxSOCB

Counter Compare (CC)

Action

Qualifier

(AQ)

CTR = CMPA

CMPAHR (8)

16

8

HiRes PWM (HRPWM)

CMPA Active (24)

EPWMA

EPWMxAO

CMPA Shadow (24)

Dead

Band

(DB)

PWM

Chopper

(PC)

Trip

Zone

(TZ)

CTR = CMPB

16

EPWMB

EPWMxBO

CMPB Active (16)

EPWMxTZINT

TZ1 to TZ6

CMPB Shadow (16)

CTR = ZERO

Figure 9-4. ePWM Sub-Modules Showing Critical Internal Signal Interconnections

9.2.3 Hi-Resolution PWM (HRPWM)

The HRPWM module offers PWM resolution (time granularity) which is significantly better than what can be

achieved using conventionally derived digital PWM methods. The key points for the HRPWM module are:

•

Significantly extends the time resolution capabilities of conventionally derived digital PWM

Typically used when effective PWM resolution falls below ~ 9–10 bits. This occurs at PWM frequencies

greater than ~200 kHz when using a CPU/System clock of 100 MHz.

•

This capability can be utilized in both duty cycle and phase-shift control methods.

Finer time granularity control or edge positioning is controlled via extensions to the Compare A and Phase

registers of the ePWM module.

•

HRPWM capabilities are offered only on the A signal path of an ePWM module (that is, on the EPWMxA

output). EPWMxB output has conventional PWM capabilities.

Submit Document Feedback

79

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.2.4 Enhanced CAP Modules (eCAP1/2/3/4)

The 280x device contains up to four enhanced capture (eCAP) modules. Figure 9-5 shows a functional block

diagram of a module. See the TMS320x280x, 2801x, 2804x Enhanced Capture (eCAP) module reference guide

for more details.

CTRPHS

(Phase Register - 32-bit)

APWM Mode

SYNCIn

CTR_OVF

OVF

CTR [0-31]

PRD [0-31]

CMP [0-31]

TSCTR

(Counter - 32-bit)

SYNCOut

PWM

Compare

Logic

Delta Mode

RST

32

CTR=PRD

CTR=CMP

CTR [0-31]

PRD [0-31]

32

LD1

CAP1

(APRD Active)

Polarity

Select

eCAPx

LD

APRD

Shadow

32

CMP [0-31]

32

Polarity

Select

LD2

32

CAP2

(ACMP Active)

LD

Event

Qualifier

ACMP

Shadow

Event

Prescale

32

Polarity

Select

LD3

LD4

32

CAP3

(APRD Shadow)

LD

CAP4

(ACMP Shadow)

Polarity

Select

LD

4

Capture Events

4

CEVT[1:4]

Interrupt

Trigger

and

Flag

Control

Continuous/

One-Shot

Capture Control

to PIE

CTR_OVF

CTR=PRD

CTR=CMP

Figure 9-5. eCAP Functional Block Diagram

80

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

The eCAP modules are clocked at the SYSCLKOUT rate.

The clock enable bits (ECAP1/2/3/4ENCLK) in the PCLKCR1 register are used to turn off the eCAP modules

individually (for low power operation). Upon reset, ECAP1ENCLK, ECAP2ENCLK, ECAP3ENCLK, and

ECAP4ENCLK are set to low, indicating that the peripheral clock is off.

Table 9-4. eCAP Control and Status Registers

SIZE

(x16)

NAME

TSCTR

eCAP1

eCAP2

eCAP3

eCAP4

DESCRIPTION

Time-Stamp Counter

0x6A00

0x6A02

0x6A04

0x6A06

0x6A08

0x6A0A

0x6A20

0x6A22

0x6A24

0x6A26

0x6A28

0x6A2A

0x6A40

0x6A42

0x6A44

0x6A46

0x6A48

0x6A4A

0x6A60

0x6A62

0x6A64

0x6A66

0x6A68

0x6A6A

2

CTRPHS

CAP1

Counter Phase Offset Value Register

Capture 1 Register

CAP2

Capture 2 Register

CAP3

Capture 3 Register

CAP4

Capture 4 Register

0x6A0C –

0x6A12

0x6A2C –

0x6A32

0x6A4C –

0x6A52

0x6A6C –

0x6A72

Reserved

8

Reserved

ECCTL1

ECCTL2

ECEINT

ECFLG

ECCLR

ECFRC

0x6A14

0x6A15

0x6A16

0x6A17

0x6A18

0x6A19

0x6A34

0x6A35

0x6A36

0x6A37

0x6A38

0x6A39

0x6A54

0x6A55

0x6A56

0x6A57

0x6A58

0x6A59

0x6A74

0x6A75

0x6A76

0x6A77

0x6A78

0x6A79

1

Capture Control Register 1

Capture Control Register 2

Capture Interrupt Enable Register

Capture Interrupt Flag Register

Capture Interrupt Clear Register

Capture Interrupt Force Register

0x6A1A –

0x6A1F

0x6A3A –

0x6A3F

0x6A5A –

0x6A5F

0x6A7A –

0x6A7F

Reserved

6

Reserved

Submit Document Feedback

81

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.2.5 Enhanced QEP Modules (eQEP1/2)

The 280x device contains up to two enhanced quadrature encoder (eQEP) modules. See the TMS320x280x,

2801x, 2804x Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse (eQEP) module reference guide for more details.

System Control

Registers

To CPU

EQEPxENCLK

SYSCLKOUT

QCPRD

QCAPCTL

16

QCTMR

16

Quadrature

Capture

Unit

QCTMRLAT

QCPRDLAT

(QCAP)

QUTMR

QUPRD

QWDTMR

QWDPRD

Registers

Used by

Multiple Units

32

16

QEPCTL

QEPSTS

QFLG

UTOUT

QWDOG

UTIME

QDECCTL

16

WDTOUT

EQEPxAIN

EQEPxBIN

EQEPxIIN

EQEPxA/XCLK

EQEPxB/XDIR

EQEPxI

QCLK

QDIR

QI

EQEPxINT

16

PIE

Position Counter/

Control Unit

(PCCU)

EQEPxIOUT

EQEPxIOE

EQEPxSIN

EQEPxSOUT

EQEPxSOE

Quadrature

Decoder

(QDU)

QS

GPIO

MUX

QPOSLAT

QPOSSLAT

QPOSILAT

PHE

PCSOUT

EQEPxS

32

16

QPOSCNT

QPOSINIT

QPOSMAX

QEINT

QFRC

QPOSCMP

QCLR

QPOSCTL

Enhanced QEP (eQEP) Peripheral

Figure 9-6. eQEP Functional Block Diagram

82

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Table 9-5 provides a summary of the eQEP registers.

Table 9-5. eQEP Control and Status Registers

eQEP1

SIZE(x16)/

#SHADOW

eQEP1

ADDRESS

eQEP2

ADDRESS

NAME

REGISTER DESCRIPTION

QPOSCNT

0x6B00

0x6B02

0x6B04

0x6B06

0x6B08

0x6B0A

0x6B0C

0x6B0E

0x6B10

0x6B12

0x6B13

0x6B14

0x6B15

0x6B16

0x6B17

0x6B18

0x6B19

0x6B1A

0x6B1B

0x6B1C

0x6B1D

0x6B1E

0x6B1F

0x6B20

0x6B40

0x6B42

0x6B44

0x6B46

0x6B48

0x6B4A

0x6B4C

0x6B4E

0x6B50

0x6B52

0x6B53

0x6B54

0x6B55

0x6B56

0x6B57

0x6B58

0x6B59

0x6B5A

0x6B5B

0x6B5C

0x6B5D

0x6B5E

0x6B5F

0x6B60

2/0

2/1

2/0

1/0

eQEP Position Counter

QPOSINIT

QPOSMAX

QPOSCMP

QPOSILAT

QPOSSLAT

QPOSLAT

QUTMR

eQEP Initialization Position Count

eQEP Maximum Position Count

eQEP Position-compare

eQEP Index Position Latch

eQEP Strobe Position Latch

eQEP Position Latch

eQEP Unit Timer

QUPRD

eQEP Unit Period Register

eQEP Watchdog Timer

QWDTMR

QWDPRD

QDECCTL

QEPCTL

QCAPCTL

QPOSCTL

QEINT

eQEP Watchdog Period Register

eQEP Decoder Control Register

eQEP Control Register

eQEP Capture Control Register

eQEP Position-compare Control Register

eQEP Interrupt Enable Register

eQEP Interrupt Flag Register

eQEP Interrupt Clear Register

eQEP Interrupt Force Register

eQEP Status Register

QFLG

QCLR

QFRC

QEPSTS

QCTMR

eQEP Capture Timer

QCPRD

eQEP Capture Period Register

eQEP Capture Timer Latch

eQEP Capture Period Latch

QCTMRLAT

QCPRDLAT

0x6B21–

0x6B3F

0x6B61 –

0x6B7F

Reserved

31/0

Reserved

Submit Document Feedback

83

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.2.6 Enhanced Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Module

A simplified functional block diagram of the ADC module is shown in Figure 9-7. The ADC module consists of a

12-bit ADC with a built-in sample-and-hold (S/H) circuit. Functions of the ADC module include:

•

12-bit ADC core with built-in S/H

Analog input: 0.0 V to 3.0 V (Voltages above 3.0 V produce full-scale conversion results.)

Fast conversion rate: Up to 80 ns at 25-MHz ADC clock, 12.5 MSPS

16-channel, MUXed inputs

Autosequencing capability provides up to 16 "autoconversions" in a single session. Each conversion can be

programmed to select anyone of 16 input channels

•

Sequencer can be operated as two independent 8-channel sequencers or as one large 16-channel

sequencer (that is, two cascaded 8-channel sequencers)

Sixteen result registers (individually addressable) to store conversion values

– The digital value of the input analog voltage is derived by:

, when ADCIN £ ADCLO

, when ADCLO < ADCIN < 3 V

, when ADCIN ³ 3 V

Digital Value = 0

ADCIN - ADCLO

4096 ´

(

Digital Value = floor

(

3

Digital Value = 4095

A. All fractional values are truncated.

•

Multiple triggers as sources for the start-of-conversion (SOC) sequence

– S/W - software immediate start

– ePWM start of conversion

– XINT2 ADC start of conversion

•

Flexible interrupt control allows interrupt request on every end-of-sequence (EOS) or every other EOS.

Sequencer can operate in "start/stop" mode, allowing multiple "time-sequenced triggers" to synchronize

conversions.

•

SOCA and SOCB triggers can operate independently in dual-sequencer mode.

Sample-and-hold (S/H) acquisition time window has separate prescale control.

The ADC module in the 280x has been enhanced to provide flexible interface to ePWM peripherals. The ADC

interface is built around a fast, 12-bit ADC module with a fast conversion rate of up to 80 ns at 25-MHz ADC

clock. The ADC module has a 16-channel sequencer, configurable as two independent 8-channel sequencers.

The two independent 8-channel sequencers can be cascaded to form a 16-channel sequencer. Although there

are multiple input channels and two sequencers, there is only one converter in the ADC module. Figure 9-7

shows the block diagram of the ADC module.

The two 8-channel sequencer modules have the capability to autosequence a series of conversions, each

module has the choice of selecting any one of the respective eight channels available through an analog MUX.

In the cascaded mode, the autosequencer functions as a single 16-channel sequencer. On each sequencer,

once the conversion is complete, the selected channel value is stored in its respective RESULT register.

Autosequencing allows the system to convert the same channel multiple times, allowing the user to perform

oversampling algorithms. This gives increased resolution over traditional single-sampled conversion results.

84

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

SYSCLKOUT

System

Control Block

High-Speed

Prescaler

DSP

ADCENCLK

HALT

HSPCLK

Analog

MUX

Result Registers

Result Reg 0

Result Reg 1

ADCINA0

70A8h

S/H

ADCINA7

ADCINB0

ADCINB7

12-Bit

ADC

Module

Result Reg 7

Result Reg 8

70AFh

70B0h

S/H

Result Reg 15

70B7h

ADC Control Registers

S/W

Sequencer 1

Sequencer 2

EPWMSOCA

SOC

EPWMSOCB

GPIO/XINT2_

ADCSOC

Figure 9-7. Block Diagram of the ADC Module

To obtain the specified accuracy of the ADC, proper board layout is very critical. To the best extent possible,

traces leading to the ADCIN pins should not run in close proximity to the digital signal paths. This is to minimize

switching noise on the digital lines from getting coupled to the ADC inputs. Furthermore, proper isolation

techniques must be used to isolate the ADC module power pins (V_DD1A18, V_DD2A18, V_DDA2, V_DDAIO) from the

digital supply. Figure 9-8 and Figure 9-9 show the ADC pin connections for the 280x devices.

Note

1. The ADC registers are accessed at the SYSCLKOUT rate. The internal timing of the ADC module

is controlled by the high-speed peripheral clock (HSPCLK).

2. The behavior of the ADC module based on the state of the ADCENCLK and HALT signals is as

follows:

•

ADCENCLK: On reset, this signal will be low. While reset is active-low ( XRS) the clock to the

register will still function. This is necessary to make sure all registers and modes go into their

default reset state. The analog module, however, will be in a low-power inactive state. As soon

as reset goes high, then the clock to the registers will be disabled. When the user sets the

ADCENCLK signal high, then the clocks to the registers will be enabled and the analog module

will be enabled. There will be a certain time delay (ms range) before the ADC is stable and can

be used.

•

HALT: This mode only affects the analog module. It does not affect the registers. In this mode,

the ADC module goes into low-power mode. This mode also will stop the clock to the CPU,

which will stop the HSPCLK; therefore, the ADC register logic will be turned off indirectly.

Figure 9-8 shows the ADC pin-biasing for internal reference and Figure 9-9 shows the ADC pin-biasing for

external reference.

Submit Document Feedback

85

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

ADCINA[7:0]

ADCINB[7:0]

ADCLO

ADC 16-Channel Analog Inputs

Analog input 0-3 V with respect to ADCLO

Connect to analog ground

Float or ground if internal reference is used

ADCREFIN

22 k

ADC External Current Bias Resistor

ADCRESEXT

2.2 μF^(A)

ADC Reference Positive Output

ADC Reference Medium Output

ADCREFP

ADCREFM

ADCREFP and ADCREFM should not

be loaded by external circuitry

V_DD1A18

V_DD2A18

V_SS1AGND

V_SS2AGND

ADC Analog Power Pin (1.8 V)

ADC Analog Ground Pin

ADC Power

ADC Analog Ground Pin

V_DDA2

V_SSA2

ADC Analog Power Pin (3.3 V)

ADC Analog Ground Pin

ADC Analog and Reference I/O Power

V_DDAIO

V_SSAIO

ADC Analog Power Pin (3.3 V)

ADC Analog I/O Ground Pin

A. TAIYO YUDEN LMK212BJ225MG-T or equivalent

B. External decoupling capacitors are recommended on all power pins.

C. Analog inputs must be driven from an operational amplifier that does not degrade the ADC performance.

Figure 9-8. ADC Pin Connections With Internal Reference

86

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

ADCINA[7:0]

ADC 16-Channel Analog Inputs

Analog input 0-3 V with respect to ADCLO

ADCINB[7:0]

ADCLO

ADCREFIN

Connect to Analog Ground

Connect to 1.500, 1.024, or 2.048-V precision source^(D)

22 k

ADC External Current Bias Resistor

ADCRESEXT

ADCREFP

2.2 μF^(A)

ADC Reference Positive Output

ADC Reference Medium Output

ADCREFP and ADCREFM should not

be loaded by external circuitry

ADCREFM

V_DD1A18

V_DD2A18

V_SS1AGND

V_SS2AGND

ADC Analog Power Pin (1.8 V)

ADC Analog Ground Pin

ADC Analog Power

ADC Analog Ground Pin

V_DDA2

V_SSA2

ADC Analog Power Pin (3.3 V)

ADC Analog Ground Pin

V_DDAIO

V_SSAIO

ADC Analog Power Pin (3.3 V)

ADC Analog I/O Ground Pin

ADC Analog and Reference I/O Power

A. TAIYO YUDEN LMK212BJ225MG-T or equivalent

B. External decoupling capacitors are recommended on all power pins.

C. Analog inputs must be driven from an operational amplifier that does not degrade the ADC performance.

D. External voltage on ADCREFIN is enabled by changing bits 15:14 in the ADC Reference Select register depending on the voltage used

on this pin. TI recommends TI part REF3020 or equivalent for 2.048-V generation. Overall gain accuracy will be determined by accuracy

of this voltage source.

Figure 9-9. ADC Pin Connections With External Reference

Note

The temperature rating of any recommended component must match the rating of the end product.

Submit Document Feedback

87

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.2.6.1 ADC Connections if the ADC Is Not Used

It is recommended to keep the connections for the analog power pins, even if the ADC is not used. Following is a

summary of how the ADC pins should be connected, if the ADC is not used in an application:

•

V_DD1A18/V_DD2A18– Connect to V_DD

V_DDA2, V_DDAIO– Connect to V_DDIO

V_SS1AGND/V_SS2AGND, V_SSA2, V_SSAIO– Connect to V_SS

ADCLO – Connect to V_SS

ADCREFIN – Connect to V_SS

ADCREFP/ADCREFM – Connect a 100-nF cap to V_SS

ADCRESEXT – Connect a 20-kΩ resistor (very loose tolerance) to V_SS

ADCINAn, ADCINBn - Connect to V_SS

.

When the ADC is not used, be sure that the clock to the ADC module is not turned on to realize power savings.

When the ADC module is used in an application, unused ADC input pins should be connected to analog ground

(V_SS1AGND/V_SS2AGND

)

88

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.2.6.2 ADC Registers

The ADC operation is configured, controlled, and monitored by the registers listed in Table 9-6.

Table 9-6. ADC Registers

NAME⁽¹⁾

ADCTRL1

ADDRESS⁽¹⁾ADDRESS⁽²⁾SIZE (x16)

DESCRIPTION

0x7100

0x7101

0x7102

0x7103

0x7104

0x7105

0x7106

0x7107

0x7108

0x7109

0x710A

0x710B

0x710C

0x710D

0x710E

0x710F

0x7110

0x7111

0x7112

0x7113

0x7114

0x7115

0x7116

0x7117

0x7118

0x7119

1

ADC Control Register 1

ADC Control Register 2

ADCTRL2

ADCMAXCONV

ADCCHSELSEQ1

ADCCHSELSEQ2

ADCCHSELSEQ3

ADCCHSELSEQ4

ADCASEQSR

ADCRESULT0

ADCRESULT1

ADCRESULT2

ADCRESULT3

ADCRESULT4

ADCRESULT5

ADCRESULT6

ADCRESULT7

ADCRESULT8

ADCRESULT9

ADCRESULT10

ADCRESULT11

ADCRESULT12

ADCRESULT13

ADCRESULT14

ADCRESULT15

ADCTRL3

ADC Maximum Conversion Channels Register

ADC Channel Select Sequencing Control Register 1

ADC Channel Select Sequencing Control Register 2

ADC Channel Select Sequencing Control Register 3

ADC Channel Select Sequencing Control Register 4

ADC Auto-Sequence Status Register

0x0B00

0x0B01

0x0B02

0x0B03

0x0B04

0x0B05

0x0B06

0x0B07

0x0B08

0x0B09

0x0B0A

0x0B0B

0x0B0C

0x0B0D

0x0B0E

0x0B0F

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 0

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 1

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 2

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 3

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 4

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 5

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 6

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 7

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 8

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 9

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 10

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 11

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 12

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 13

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 14

ADC Conversion Result Buffer Register 15

ADC Control Register 3

ADCST

ADC Status Register

0x711A –

0x711B

Reserved

2

Reserved

ADCREFSEL

ADCOFFTRIM

0x711C

0x711D

1

ADC Reference Select Register

ADC Offset Trim Register

0x711E –

0x711F

Reserved

2

Reserved

(1) The registers in this column are Peripheral Frame 2 Registers.

(2) The ADC result registers are dual mapped in the 280x DSP. Locations in Peripheral Frame 2 (0x7108-0x7117) are 2 wait-states and

left justified. Locations in Peripheral frame 0 space (0x0B00-0x0B0F) are 0 wait sates and right justified. During high-speed/continuous

conversion use of the ADC, use the 0 wait-state locations for fast transfer of ADC results to user memory.

Submit Document Feedback

89

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.2.7 Enhanced Controller Area Network (eCAN) Modules (eCAN-A and eCAN-B)

The CAN module has the following features:

•

Fully compliant with CAN protocol, version 2.0B

Supports data rates up to 1 Mbps

Thirty-two mailboxes, each with the following properties:

– Configurable as receive or transmit

– Configurable with standard or extended identifier

– Has a programmable receive mask

– Supports data and remote frame

– Composed of 0 to 8 bytes of data

– Uses a 32-bit time stamp on receive and transmit message

– Protects against reception of new message

– Holds the dynamically programmable priority of transmit message

– Employs a programmable interrupt scheme with two interrupt levels

– Employs a programmable alarm on transmission or reception time-out

Low-power mode

Programmable wake-up on bus activity

Automatic reply to a remote request message

Automatic retransmission of a frame in case of loss of arbitration or error

•

32-bit local network time counter synchronized by a specific message (communication in conjunction with

mailbox 16)

•

Self-test mode

– Operates in a loopback mode receiving its own message. A "dummy" acknowledge is provided, thereby

eliminating the need for another node to provide the acknowledge bit.

Note

For a SYSCLKOUT of 100 MHz, the smallest bit rate possible is 15.625 kbps.

For a SYSCLKOUT of 60 MHz, the smallest bit rate possible is 9.375 kbps.

90

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

eCAN0INT

eCAN1INT

Controls Address

Data

32

Enhanced CAN Controller

Message Controller

Mailbox RAM

(512 Bytes)

Memory Management

Unit

eCAN Memory

(512 Bytes)

Registers and

CPU Interface,

Receive Control Unit,

Timer Management Unit

32-Message Mailbox

of 4 x 32-Bit Words

Message Objects Control

32

eCAN Protocol Kernel

Receive Buffer

Transmit Buffer

Control Buffer

Status Buffer

SN65HVD23x

3.3-V CAN Transceiver

CAN Bus

Figure 9-10. eCAN Block Diagram and Interface Circuit

Table 9-7. 3.3-V eCAN Transceivers

SUPPLY

VOLTAGE

LOW-POWER

MODE

SLOPE

CONTROL

PART NUMBER

VREF

OTHER

T_A

SN65HVD230

SN65HVD230Q

SN65HVD231

SN65HVD231Q

SN65HVD232

SN65HVD232Q

SN65HVD233

3.3 V

Standby

Sleep

Adjustable

None

Yes

–

–40°C to 85°C

–40°C to 125°C

–40°C to 85°C

–40°C to 125°C

–40°C to 85°C

–40°C to 125°C

Yes

Sleep

Yes

None

Standby

Adjustable

Diagnostic

Loopback

SN65HVD234

SN65HVD235

3.3 V

Standby & Sleep

Standby

Adjustable

None

–

–40°C to 125°C

Autobaud

Loopback

Submit Document Feedback

91

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

eCAN-A Control and Status Registers

Mailbox Enable - CANME

Mailbox Direction - CANMD

Transmission Request Set - CANTRS

Transmission Request Reset - CANTRR

Transmission Acknowledge - CANTA

Abort Acknowledge - CANAA

eCAN-A Memory (512 Bytes)

Control and Status Registers

6000h

Received Message Pending - CANRMP

Received Message Lost - CANRML

Remote Frame Pending - CANRFP

Global Acceptance Mask - CANGAM

603Fh

6040h

Local Acceptance Masks (LAM)

(32 x 32-Bit RAM)

607Fh

6080h

Master Control - CANMC

Message Object Time Stamps (MOTS)

(32 x 32-Bit RAM)

Bit-Timing Configuration - CANBTC

60BFh

60C0h

Error and Status - CANES

Message Object Time-Out (MOTO)

(32 x 32-Bit RAM)

Transmit Error Counter - CANTEC

Receive Error Counter - CANREC

Global Interrupt Flag 0 - CANGIF0

Global Interrupt Mask - CANGIM

Global Interrupt Flag 1 - CANGIF1

Mailbox Interrupt Mask - CANMIM

Mailbox Interrupt Level - CANMIL

60FFh

eCAN-A Memory RAM (512 Bytes)

6100h-6107h

6108h-610Fh

6110h-6117h

6118h-611Fh

6120h-6127h

Mailbox 0

Mailbox 1

Mailbox 2

Mailbox 3

Mailbox 4

Overwrite Protection Control - CANOPC

TX I/O Control - CANTIOC

RX I/O Control - CANRIOC

Time Stamp Counter - CANTSC

Time-Out Control - CANTOC

Time-Out Status - CANTOS

61E0h-61E7h

61E8h-61EFh

61F0h-61F7h

61F8h-61FFh

Mailbox 28

Mailbox 29

Mailbox 30

Mailbox 31

Reserved

Message Mailbox (16 Bytes)

Message Identifier - MSGID

Message Control - MSGCTRL

Message Data Low - MDL

Message Data High - MDH

61E8h-61E9h

61EAh-61EBh

61ECh-61EDh

61EEh-61EFh

Figure 9-11. eCAN-A Memory Map

Note

If the eCAN module is not used in an application, the RAM available (LAM, MOTS, MOTO, and

mailbox RAM) can be used as general-purpose RAM. The CAN module clock should be enabled for

this.

92

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

eCAN-B Control and Status Registers

Mailbox Enable - CANME

Mailbox Direction - CANMD

Transmission Request Set - CANTRS

Transmission Request Reset - CANTRR

Transmission Acknowledge - CANTA

eCAN-B Memory (512 Bytes)

Control and Status Registers

Abort Acknowledge - CANAA

Received Message Pending - CANRMP

Received Message Lost - CANRML

Remote Frame Pending - CANRFP

Global Acceptance Mask - CANGAM

6200h

623Fh

6240h

Local Acceptance Masks (LAM)

(32 x 32-Bit RAM)

627Fh

6280h

Master Control - CANMC

Message Object Time Stamps (MOTS)

(32 x 32-Bit RAM)

Bit-Timing Configuration - CANBTC

62BFh

62C0h

Error and Status - CANES

Message Object Time-Out (MOTO)

(32 x 32-Bit RAM)

Transmit Error Counter - CANTEC

Receive Error Counter - CANREC

Global Interrupt Flag 0 - CANGIF0

Global Interrupt Mask - CANGIM

Global Interrupt Flag 1 - CANGIF1

Mailbox Interrupt Mask - CANMIM

Mailbox Interrupt Level - CANMIL

62FFh

eCAN-B Memory RAM (512 Bytes)

6300h-6307h

6308h-630Fh

6310h-6317h

6318h-631Fh

6320h-6327h

Mailbox 0

Mailbox 1

Mailbox 2

Mailbox 3

Mailbox 4

Overwrite Protection Control - CANOPC

TX I/O Control - CANTIOC

RX I/O Control - CANRIOC

Time Stamp Counter - CANTSC

Time-Out Control - CANTOC

Time-Out Status - CANTOS

63E0h-63E7h

63E8h-63EFh

63F0h-63F7h

63F8h-63FFh

Mailbox 28

Mailbox 29

Mailbox 30

Mailbox 31

Reserved

Message Mailbox (16 Bytes)

Message Identifier - MSGID

Message Control - MSGCTRL

Message Data Low - MDL

Message Data High - MDH

63E8h-63E9h

63EAh-63EBh

63ECh-63EDh

63EEh-63EFh

Figure 9-12. eCAN-B Memory Map

Submit Document Feedback

93

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

The CAN registers listed in Table 9-8 are used by the CPU to configure and control the CAN controller and the

message objects. eCAN control registers only support 32-bit read/write operations. Mailbox RAM can be

accessed as 16 bits or 32 bits. 32-bit accesses are aligned to an even boundary.

Table 9-8. CAN Register Map

REGISTER

NAME⁽¹⁾

eCAN-A

ADDRESS

eCAN-B

ADDRESS

SIZE

(x32)

DESCRIPTION

CANME

CANMD

0x6000

0x6002

0x6004

0x6006

0x6008

0x600A

0x600C

0x600E

0x6010

0x6012

0x6014

0x6016

0x6018

0x601A

0x601C

0x601E

0x6020

0x6022

0x6024

0x6026

0x6028

0x602A

0x602C

0x602E

0x6030

0x6032

0x6200

0x6202

0x6204

0x6206

0x6208

0x620A

0x620C

0x620E

0x6210

0x6212

0x6214

0x6216

0x6218

0x621A

0x621C

0x621E

0x6220

0x6222

0x6224

0x6226

0x6228

0x622A

0x622C

0x622E

0x6230

0x6232

1

Mailbox enable

Mailbox direction

CANTRS

CANTRR

CANTA

Transmit request set

Transmit request reset

Transmission acknowledge

Abort acknowledge

CANAA

CANRMP

CANRML

CANRFP

CANGAM

CANMC

Receive message pending

Receive message lost

Remote frame pending

Global acceptance mask

Master control

CANBTC

CANES

Bit-timing configuration

Error and status

CANTEC

CANREC

CANGIF0

CANGIM

CANGIF1

CANMIM

CANMIL

CANOPC

CANTIOC

CANRIOC

CANTSC

CANTOC

CANTOS

Transmit error counter

Receive error counter

Global interrupt flag 0

Global interrupt mask

Global interrupt flag 1

Mailbox interrupt mask

Mailbox interrupt level

Overwrite protection control

TX I/O control

RX I/O control

Time stamp counter (Reserved in SCC mode)

Time-out control (Reserved in SCC mode)

Time-out status (Reserved in SCC mode)

(1) These registers are mapped to Peripheral Frame 1.

94

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.2.8 Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Modules (SCI-A, SCI-B)

The 280x devices include two serial communications interface (SCI) modules. The SCI modules support digital

communications between the CPU and other asynchronous peripherals that use the standard non-return-to-zero

(NRZ) format. The SCI receiver and transmitter are double-buffered, and each has its own separate enable and

interrupt bits. Both can be operated independently or simultaneously in the full-duplex mode. To ensure data

integrity, the SCI checks received data for break detection, parity, overrun, and framing errors. The bit rate is

programmable to over 65000 different speeds through a 16-bit baud-select register.

Features of each SCI module include:

•

Two external pins:

– SCITXD: SCI transmit-output pin

– SCIRXD: SCI receive-input pin

Note

NOTE: Both pins can be used as GPIO if not used for SCI.

– Baud rate programmable to 64K different rates:

LSPCLK

Baud rate =

when BRR ¹ 0

when BRR = 0

(BRR + 1) * 8

LSPCLK

16

•

Data-word format

– One start bit

– Data-word length programmable from one to eight bits

– Optional even/odd/no parity bit

– One or two stop bits

•

Four error-detection flags: parity, overrun, framing, and break detection

Two wake-up multiprocessor modes: idle-line and address bit

Half- or full-duplex operation

Double-buffered receive and transmit functions

Transmitter and receiver operations can be accomplished through interrupt-driven or polled algorithms with

status flags.

– Transmitter: TXRDY flag (transmitter-buffer register is ready to receive another character) and TX EMPTY

flag (transmitter-shift register is empty)

– Receiver: RXRDY flag (receiver-buffer register is ready to receive another character), BRKDT flag (break

condition occurred), and RX ERROR flag (monitoring four interrupt conditions)

Separate enable bits for transmitter and receiver interrupts (except BRKDT)

•

100 MHz

Max bit rate =

= 6.25 ´ ⁶b/s (for 100 -MHz devices)

10

16

60 MHz

16

Max bit rate =

= 3.75 ´ ⁶b/s (for 60 -MHz devices)

10

•

NRZ (non-return-to-zero) format

Ten SCI module control registers located in the control register frame beginning at address 7050h

Note

All registers in this module are 8-bit registers that are connected to Peripheral Frame 2. When a

register is accessed, the register data is in the lower byte (7–0), and the upper byte (15–8) is read

as zeros. Writing to the upper byte has no effect.

Submit Document Feedback

95

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Enhanced features:

•

Auto baud-detect hardware logic

16-level transmit/receive FIFO

The SCI port operation is configured and controlled by the registers listed in Table 9-9 and Table 9-10.

Table 9-9. SCI-A Registers

NAME⁽¹⁾

SCICCRA

ADDRESS

0x7050

0x7051

0x7052

0x7053

0x7054

0x7055

0x7056

0x7057

0x7059

0x705A

0x705B

0x705C

0x705F

SIZE (x16)

DESCRIPTION

SCI-A Communications Control Register

SCI-A Control Register 1

1

SCICTL1A

SCIHBAUDA

SCILBAUDA

SCICTL2A

SCI-A Baud Register, High Bits

SCI-A Baud Register, Low Bits

SCI-A Control Register 2

SCIRXSTA

SCIRXEMUA

SCIRXBUFA

SCITXBUFA

SCIFFTXA⁽²⁾

SCIFFRXA⁽²⁾

SCIFFCTA⁽²⁾

SCIPRIA

SCI-A Receive Status Register

SCI-A Receive Emulation Data Buffer Register

SCI-A Receive Data Buffer Register

SCI-A Transmit Data Buffer Register

SCI-A FIFO Transmit Register

SCI-A FIFO Receive Register

SCI-A FIFO Control Register

SCI-A Priority Control Register

(1) Registers in this table are mapped to Peripheral Frame 2 space. This space only allows 16-bit accesses. 32-bit accesses produce

undefined results.

(2) These registers are new registers for the FIFO mode.

Table 9-10. SCI-B Registers

NAME^{(1) (2)}

SCICCRB

ADDRESS

0x7750

0x7751

0x7752

0x7753

0x7754

0x7755

0x7756

0x7757

0x7759

0x775A

0x775B

0x775C

0x775F

SIZE (x16)

DESCRIPTION

SCI-B Communications Control Register

SCI-B Control Register 1

1

SCICTL1B

SCIHBAUDB

SCILBAUDB

SCICTL2B

SCI-B Baud Register, High Bits

SCI-B Baud Register, Low Bits

SCI-B Control Register 2

SCIRXSTB

SCIRXEMUB

SCIRXBUFB

SCITXBUFB

SCIFFTXB⁽²⁾

SCIFFRXB⁽²⁾

SCIFFCTB⁽²⁾

SCIPRIB

SCI-B Receive Status Register

SCI-B Receive Emulation Data Buffer Register

SCI-B Receive Data Buffer Register

SCI-B Transmit Data Buffer Register

SCI-B FIFO Transmit Register

SCI-B FIFO Receive Register

SCI-B FIFO Control Register

SCI-B Priority Control Register

(1) Registers in this table are mapped to peripheral bus 16 space. This space only allows 16-bit accesses. 32-bit accesses produce

undefined results.

(2) These registers are new registers for the FIFO mode.

Figure 9-13 shows the SCI module block diagram.

96

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

SCICTL1.1

SCITXD

TXSHF

Register

Frame Format and Mode

Parity

Even/Odd Enable

TXENA

TX EMPTY

SCICTL2.6

8

SCICCR.6 SCICCR.5

TX INT ENA

TXRDY

Transmitter-Data

Buffer Register

SCICTL2.7

SCICTL2.0

8

TXWAKE

TXINT

TX FIFO _0

SCICTL1.3

TX Interrupt Logic

TX FIFO _1

- - - - -

To CPU

TX

FIFO

Interrupts

1

SCI TX Interrupt Select Logic

TX FIFO _15

WUT

SCITXBUF.7-0

TX FIFO Registers

SCIFFENA

AutoBaud Detect Logic

SCIRXD

SCIFFTX.14

SCIHBAUD. 15 - 8

Baud Rate

MSbyte

Register

SCIRXD

RXSHF Register

RXWAKE

LSPCLK

SCIRXST.1

SCILBAUD. 7 - 0

RXENA

SCICTL1.0

8

Baud Rate

LSbyte

Register

SCICTL2.1

RXRDY

RX/BK INT ENA

Receive-Data

Buffer Register

SCIRXBUF.7-0

SCIRXST.6

BRKDT

8

SCIRXST.5

RX FIFO _15

- - - - -

RX

FIFO

Interrupts

RX FIFO _1

RX FIFO _0

RXINT

To CPU

RX Interrupt Logic

SCIRXBUF.7-0

RX FIFO Registers

RXFFOVF

SCIRXST.7 SCIRXST.4 - 2

SCIFFRX.15

RX Error

FE OE PE

RX Error

RX ERR INT ENA

SCI RX Interrupt Select Logic

SCICTL1.6

Figure 9-13. Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Module Block Diagram

Submit Document Feedback

97

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.2.9 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Modules (SPI-A, SPI-B, SPI-C, SPI-D)

The 280x devices include the four-pin serial peripheral interface (SPI) module. Up to four SPI modules (SPI-A,

SPI-B, SPI-C, and SPI-D) are available. The SPI is a high-speed, synchronous serial I/O port that allows a serial

bit stream of programmed length (one to sixteen bits) to be shifted into and out of the device at a programmable

bit-transfer rate. Normally, the SPI is used for communications between the DSP controller and external

peripherals or another processor. Typical applications include external I/O or peripheral expansion through

devices such as shift registers, display drivers, and ADCs. Multidevice communications are supported by the

master/slave operation of the SPI.

The SPI module features include:

•

Four external pins:

– SPISOMI: SPI slave-output/master-input pin

– SPISIMO: SPI slave-input/master-output pin

– SPISTE: SPI slave transmit-enable pin

– SPICLK: SPI serial-clock pin

Note

NOTE: All four pins can be used as GPIO, if the SPI module is not used.

Two operational modes: master and slave

Baud rate: 125 different programmable rates.

LSPCLK

•

Baud rate =

when SPIBRR = 3 to127

(SPIBRR + 1)

LSPCLK

4

when SPIBRR = 0,1, 2

Baud rate =

•

Data word length: one to sixteen data bits

Four clocking schemes (controlled by clock polarity and clock phase bits) include:

– Falling edge without phase delay: SPICLK active-high. SPI transmits data on the falling edge of the

SPICLK signal and receives data on the rising edge of the SPICLK signal.

– Falling edge with phase delay: SPICLK active-high. SPI transmits data one half-cycle ahead of the falling

edge of the SPICLK signal and receives data on the falling edge of the SPICLK signal.

– Rising edge without phase delay: SPICLK inactive-low. SPI transmits data on the rising edge of the

SPICLK signal and receives data on the falling edge of the SPICLK signal.

– Rising edge with phase delay: SPICLK inactive-low. SPI transmits data one half-cycle ahead of the rising

edge of the SPICLK signal and receives data on the rising edge of the SPICLK signal.

Simultaneous receive and transmit operation (transmit function can be disabled in software)

Transmitter and receiver operations are accomplished through either interrupt-driven or polled algorithms.

Nine SPI module control registers: Located in control register frame beginning at address 7040h.

•

Note

All registers in this module are 16-bit registers that are connected to Peripheral Frame 2. When a

register is accessed, the register data is in the lower byte (7–0), and the upper byte (15–8) is read

as zeros. Writing to the upper byte has no effect.

Enhanced feature:

•

16-level transmit/receive FIFO

Delayed transmit control

98

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

The SPI port operation is configured and controlled by the registers listed in Table 9-11 through Table 9-14 .

Table 9-11. SPI-A Registers

SIZE (x16)

NAME

SPICCR

SPICTL

ADDRESS

0x7040

0x7041

0x7042

0x7044

0x7046

0x7047

0x7048

0x7049

0x704A

0x704B

0x704C

0x704F

DESCRIPTION⁽¹⁾

1

SPI-A Configuration Control Register

SPI-A Operation Control Register

SPI-A Status Register

SPISTS

SPIBRR

SPIRXEMU

SPIRXBUF

SPITXBUF

SPIDAT

SPI-A Baud Rate Register

SPI-A Receive Emulation Buffer Register

SPI-A Serial Input Buffer Register

SPI-A Serial Output Buffer Register

SPI-A Serial Data Register

SPIFFTX

SPIFFRX

SPIFFCT

SPIPRI

SPI-A FIFO Transmit Register

SPI-A FIFO Receive Register

SPI-A FIFO Control Register

SPI-A Priority Control Register

(1) Registers in this table are mapped to Peripheral Frame 2. This space only allows 16-bit accesses. 32-bit accesses produce undefined

results.

Table 9-12. SPI-B Registers

SIZE (x16)

NAME

SPICCR

SPICTL

ADDRESS

0x7740

0x7741

0x7742

0x7744

0x7746

0x7747

0x7748

0x7749

0x774A

0x774B

0x774C

0x774F

DESCRIPTION⁽¹⁾

1

SPI-B Configuration Control Register

SPI-B Operation Control Register

SPI-B Status Register

SPISTS

SPIBRR

SPIRXEMU

SPIRXBUF

SPITXBUF

SPIDAT

SPI-B Baud Rate Register

SPI-B Receive Emulation Buffer Register

SPI-B Serial Input Buffer Register

SPI-B Serial Output Buffer Register

SPI-B Serial Data Register

SPIFFTX

SPIFFRX

SPIFFCT

SPIPRI

SPI-B FIFO Transmit Register

SPI-B FIFO Receive Register

SPI-B FIFO Control Register

SPI-B Priority Control Register

(1) Registers in this table are mapped to Peripheral Frame 2. This space only allows 16-bit accesses. 32-bit accesses produce undefined

results.

Submit Document Feedback

99

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Table 9-13. SPI-C Registers

SIZE (x16)

NAME

SPICCR

SPICTL

ADDRESS

0x7760

0x7761

0x7762

0x7764

0x7766

0x7767

0x7768

0x7769

0x776A

0x776B

0x776C

0x776F

DESCRIPTION⁽¹⁾

1

SPI-C Configuration Control Register

SPI-C Operation Control Register

SPI-C Status Register

SPISTS

SPIBRR

SPIRXEMU

SPIRXBUF

SPITXBUF

SPIDAT

SPI-C Baud Rate Register

SPI-C Receive Emulation Buffer Register

SPI-C Serial Input Buffer Register

SPI-C Serial Output Buffer Register

SPI-C Serial Data Register

SPIFFTX

SPIFFRX

SPIFFCT

SPIPRI

SPI-C FIFO Transmit Register

SPI-C FIFO Receive Register

SPI-C FIFO Control Register

SPI-C Priority Control Register

(1) Registers in this table are mapped to Peripheral Frame 2. This space only allows 16-bit accesses. 32-bit accesses produce undefined

results.

Table 9-14. SPI-D Registers

SIZE (x16)

NAME

SPICCR

SPICTL

ADDRESS

0x7780

0x7781

0x7782

0x7784

0x7786

0x7787

0x7788

0x7789

0x778A

0x778B

0x778C

0x778F

DESCRIPTION⁽¹⁾

1

SPI-D Configuration Control Register

SPI-D Operation Control Register

SPI-D Status Register

SPISTS

SPIBRR

SPIRXEMU

SPIRXBUF

SPITXBUF

SPIDAT

SPI-D Baud Rate Register

SPI-D Receive Emulation Buffer Register

SPI-D Serial Input Buffer Register

SPI-D Serial Output Buffer Register

SPI-D Serial Data Register

SPIFFTX

SPIFFRX

SPIFFCT

SPIPRI

SPI-D FIFO Transmit Register

SPI-D FIFO Receive Register

SPI-D FIFO Control Register

SPI-D Priority Control Register

(1) Registers in this table are mapped to Peripheral Frame 2. This space only allows 16-bit accesses. 32-bit accesses produce undefined

results.

Figure 9-14 is a block diagram of the SPI in slave mode.

100 Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

SPIFFENA

SPIFFTX.14

Overrun

INT ENA

Receiver

Overrun Flag

RX FIFO Registers

SPIRXBUF

RX FIFO _0

RX FIFO _1

- - - - -

SPISTS.7

SPICTL.4

RX

FIFO

Interrupt

RX FIFO _15

SPIINT/SPIRXINT

To CPU

RX Interrupt

Logic

16

SPIFFOVF

FLAG

SPIRXBUF Buffer Register

SPIFFRX.15

TX

FIFO

Interrupt

TX FIFO Registers

TX Interrupt

Logic

SPITXBUF

SPITXINT

TX FIFO _15

- - - - -

SPI

INT FLAG

SPI

INT ENA

TX FIFO _1

16

SPISTS.6

TX FIFO _0

SPICTL.0

16

SPITXBUF Buffer Register

16

M

S

M

S

SW1

SW2

SPIDAT Data Register

SPISIMO

M

S

M

S

SPIDAT.15 - 0

SPISOMI

Talk

SPICTL.1

SPISTE^(A)

State Control

Master/Slave

SPICTL.2

SPI Char

SPICCR.3 - 0

S

3

2

1

0

SW3

Clock

Polarity

Clock

Phase

M

S

SPI Bit Rate

SPICCR.6

SPICTL.3

LSPCLK

SPICLK

SPIBRR.6 - 0

M

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

A. SPISTE is driven low by the master for a slave device.

Figure 9-14. SPI Module Block Diagram (Slave Mode)

Submit Document Feedback 101

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.2.10 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)

The 280x device contains one I2C Serial Port. Figure 9-15 shows how the I2C peripheral module interfaces

within the 280x device.

The I2C module has the following features:

•

Compliance with the Philips Semiconductors I2C-bus specification (version 2.1):

– Support for 1-bit to 8-bit format transfers

– 7-bit and 10-bit addressing modes

– General call

– START byte mode

– Support for multiple master-transmitters and slave-receivers

– Support for multiple slave-transmitters and master-receivers

– Combined master transmit/receive and receive/transmit mode

– Data transfer rate of from 10 kbps up to 400 kbps (I2C Fast-mode rate)

One 16-word receive FIFO and one 16-word transmit FIFO

One interrupt that can be used by the CPU. This interrupt can be generated as a result of one of the following

conditions:

•

– Transmit-data ready

– Receive-data ready

– Register-access ready

– No-acknowledgment received

– Arbitration lost

– Stop condition detected

– Addressed as slave

•

An additional interrupt that can be used by the CPU when in FIFO mode

Module enable/disable capability

Free data format mode

102 Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

System Control Block

C28x CPU

I2CAENCLK

SYSCLKOUT

SYSRS

Control

Data[16]

SDAA

SCLA

I2C-A

Addr[16]

I2CINT1A

I2CINT2A

GPIO

MUX

PIE

Block

A. The I2C registers are accessed at the SYSCLKOUT rate. The internal timing and signal waveforms of the I2C port are also at the

SYSCLKOUT rate.

B. The clock enable bit (I2CAENCLK) in the PCLKCRO register turns off the clock to the I2C port for low power operation. Upon reset,

I2CAENCLK is clear, which indicates the peripheral internal clocks are off.

Figure 9-15. I2C Peripheral Module Interfaces

The registers in Table 9-15 configure and control the I2C port operation.

Table 9-15. I2C-A Registers

NAME

I2COAR

I2CIER

ADDRESS

0x7900

0x7901

0x7902

0x7903

0x7904

0x7905

0x7906

0x7907

0x7908

0x7909

0x790A

0x790C

0x7920

0x7921

-

DESCRIPTION

I2C own address register

I2C interrupt enable register

I2C status register

I2CSTR

I2CCLKL

I2CCLKH

I2CCNT

I2CDRR

I2CSAR

I2CDXR

I2CMDR

I2CISRC

I2CPSC

I2CFFTX

I2CFFRX

I2CRSR

I2CXSR

I2C clock low-time divider register

I2C clock high-time divider register

I2C data count register

I2C data receive register

I2C slave address register

I2C data transmit register

I2C mode register

I2C interrupt source register

I2C prescaler register

I2C FIFO transmit register

I2C FIFO receive register

I2C receive shift register (not accessible to the CPU)

I2C transmit shift register (not accessible to the CPU)

-

Submit Document Feedback 103

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.2.11 GPIO MUX

On the 280x, the GPIO MUX can multiplex up to three independent peripheral signals on a single GPIO pin in

addition to providing individual pin bit-banging IO capability. The GPIO MUX block diagram per pin is shown in

Figure 9-16. Because of the open-drain capabilities of the I2C pins, the GPIO MUX block diagram for these pins

differ. See the TMS320x280x, 2801x, 2804x DSP system control and interrupts reference guide for details.

GPIOXINT1SEL

GPIOLMPSEL

LPMCR0

GPIOXINT2SEL

GPIOXNMISEL

Low-Power

Modes Block

External Interrupt

MUX

PIE

GPxDAT (read)

Asynchronous

path

GPxQSEL1/2

GPxCTRL

GPxPUD

00

01

N/C

Peripheral 1 Input

Input

Qualification

Internal

Pullup

Peripheral 2 Input

Peripheral 3 Input

10

11

Asynchronous path

GPxTOGGLE

GPxCLEAR

GPxSET

GPIOx pin

00

01

10

11

GPxDAT (latch)

Peripheral 1 Output

Peripheral 2 Output

Peripheral 3 Output

High-Impedance

Output Control

00

01

GPxDIR (latch)

Peripheral 1 Output Enable

0 = Input, 1 = Output

XRS

Peripheral 2 Output Enable

Peripheral 3 Output Enable

10

11

= Default at Reset

GPxMUX1/2

A. x stands for the port, either A or B. For example, GPxDIR refers to either the GPADIR and GPBDIR register depending on the particular

GPIO pin selected.

B. GPxDAT latch/read are accessed at the same memory location.

Figure 9-16. GPIO MUX Block Diagram

104 Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

The 280x supports 34 GPIO pins. The GPIO control and data registers are mapped to Peripheral Frame 1 to

enable 32-bit operations on the registers (along with 16-bit operations). Table 9-16 shows the GPIO register

mapping.

Table 9-16. GPIO Registers

NAME

ADDRESS

SIZE (x16)

DESCRIPTION

GPIO CONTROL REGISTERS (EALLOW PROTECTED)

GPACTRL

GPAQSEL1

GPAQSEL2

GPAMUX1

GPAMUX2

GPADIR

0x6F80

0x6F82

0x6F84

0x6F86

0x6F88

0x6F8A

0x6F8C

2

GPIO A Control Register (GPIO0 to 31)

GPIO A Qualifier Select 1 Register (GPIO0 to 15)

GPIO A Qualifier Select 2 Register (GPIO16 to 31)

GPIO A MUX 1 Register (GPIO0 to 15)

GPIO A MUX 2 Register (GPIO16 to 31)

GPIO A Direction Register (GPIO0 to 31)

GPIO A Pull Up Disable Register (GPIO0 to 31)

GPAPUD

0x6F8E –

0x6F8F

Reserved

2

Reserved

GPBCTRL

GPBQSEL1

GPBQSEL2

GPBMUX1

GPBMUX2

GPBDIR

0x6F90

0x6F92

0x6F94

0x6F96

0x6F98

0x6F9A

0x6F9C

2

GPIO B Control Register (GPIO32 to 35)

GPIO B Qualifier Select 1 Register (GPIO32 to 35)

Reserved

GPIO B MUX 1 Register (GPIO32 to 35)

Reserved

GPIO B Direction Register (GPIO32 to 35)

GPIO B Pull Up Disable Register (GPIO32 to 35)

GPBPUD

0x6F9E –

0x6F9F

Reserved

2

Reserved

0x6FA0 –

0x6FBF

32

GPIO DATA REGISTERS (NOT EALLOW PROTECTED)

GPADAT

GPASET

0x6FC0

0x6FC2

0x6FC4

0x6FC6

0x6FC8

0x6FCA

0x6FCC

0x6FCE

2

GPIO Data Register (GPIO0 to 31)

GPIO Data Set Register (GPIO0 to 31)

GPIO Data Clear Register (GPIO0 to 31)

GPIO Data Toggle Register (GPIO0 to 31)

GPIO Data Register (GPIO32 to 35)

GPACLEAR

GPATOGGLE

GPBDAT

GPBSET

GPIO Data Set Register (GPIO32 to 35)

GPIO Data Clear Register (GPIO32 to 35)

GPIO Data Toggle Register (GPIO32 to 35)

GPBCLEAR

GPBTOGGLE

0x6FD0 –

0x6FDF

Reserved

16

Reserved

GPIO INTERRUPT AND LOW POWER MODES SELECT REGISTERS (EALLOW PROTECTED)

GPIOXINT1SEL

GPIOXINT2SEL

GPIOXNMISEL

0x6FE0

0x6FE1

0x6FE2

1

XINT1 GPIO Input Select Register (GPIO0 to 31)

XINT2 GPIO Input Select Register (GPIO0 to 31)

XNMI GPIO Input Select Register (GPIO0 to 31)

0x6FE3 –

0x6FE7

Reserved

GPIOLPMSEL

Reserved

5

2

Reserved

0x6FE8

LPM GPIO Select Register (GPIO0 to 31)

Reserved

0x6FEA –

0x6FFF

22

Submit Document Feedback 105

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Table 9-17. F2808 GPIO MUX Table

DEFAULT AT RESET

GPAMUX1/2⁽³⁾

REGISTER

BITS

PRIMARY I/O

FUNCTION

(GPxMUX1/2

BITS = 0,0)

PERIPHERAL

SELECTION 1⁽¹⁾

PERIPHERAL

SELECTION 2

PERIPHERAL

SELECTION 3

(GPxMUX1/2 BITS = 0,1)

(GPxMUX1/2 BITS = 1,0)

(GPxMUX1/2 BITS = 1,1)

GPAMUX1

1–0

GPIO0

GPIO1

GPIO2

GPIO3

GPIO4

GPIO5

GPIO6

GPIO7

GPIO8

GPIO9

GPIO10

GPIO11

GPIO12

GPIO13

GPIO14

GPIO15

EPWM1A (O)

EPWM1B (O)

EPWM2A (O)

EPWM2B (O)

EPWM3A (O)

EPWM3B (O)

EPWM4A (O)

EPWM4B (O)

EPWM5A (O)

EPWM5B (O)

EPWM6A (O)

EPWM6B (O)

TZ1 (I)

Reserved⁽²⁾

SPISIMOD (I/O)

Reserved⁽²⁾

3–2

5–4

Reserved⁽²⁾

7–6

SPISOMID (I/O)

Reserved⁽²⁾

9–8

Reserved⁽²⁾

11–10

13–12

15–14

17–16

19–18

21–20

23–22

25–24

27–26

29–28

31–30

SPICLKD (I/O)

EPWMSYNCI (I)

SPISTED (I/O)

CANTXB (O)

SCITXDB (O)

CANRXB (I)

ECAP1 (I/O)

EPWMSYNCO (O)

ECAP2 (I/O)

ADCSOCAO (O)

ECAP3 (I/O)

ADCSOCBO (O)

ECAP4 (I/O)

SCIRXDB (I)

CANTXB (O)

CANRXB (I)

SPISIMOB (I/O)

SPISOMIB (I/O)

SPICLKB (I/O)

SPISTEB (I/O)

TZ2 (I)

TZ3 (I)

SCITXDB (O)

SCIRXDB (I)

TZ4 (I)

GPAMUX2

1–0

GPIO16

GPIO17

GPIO18

GPIO19

GPIO20

GPIO21

GPIO22

GPIO23

GPIO24

GPIO25

GPIO26

GPIO27

GPIO28

GPIO29

GPIO30

GPIO31

SPISIMOA (I/O)

SPISOMIA (I/O)

SPICLKA (I/O)

SPISTEA (I/O)

EQEP1A (I)

CANTXB (O)

CANRXB (I)

SCITXDB (O)

SCIRXDB (I)

SPISIMOC (I/O)

SPISOMIC (I/O)

SPICLKC (I/O)

SPISTEC (I/O)

EQEP2A (I)

TZ5 (I)

TZ6 (I)

3–2

5–4

Reserved⁽²⁾

CANTXB (O)

CANRXB (I)

SCITXDB (O)

SCIRXDB (I)

SPISIMOB (I/O)

SPISOMIB (I/O)

SPICLKB (I/O)

SPISTEB (I/O)

TZ5 (I)

7–6

9–8

11–10

13–12

15–14

17–16

19–18

21–20

23–22

25–24

27–26

29–28

31–30

EQEP1B (I)

EQEP1S (I/O)

EQEP1I (I/O)

ECAP1 (I/O)

ECAP2 (I/O)

ECAP3 (I/O)

ECAP4 (I/O)

SCIRXDA (I)

SCITXDA (O)

CANRXA (I)

EQEP2B (I)

EQEP2I (I/O)

EQEP2S (I/O)

Reserved⁽²⁾

TZ6 (I)

Reserved⁽²⁾

CANTXA (O)

Reserved⁽²⁾

GPBMUX1

1–0

3–2

5–4

GPIO32

GPIO33

GPIO34

SDAA (I/OC)

SCLA (I/OC)

Reserved⁽²⁾

EPWMSYNCI (I)

EPWMSYNCO (O)

Reserved⁽²⁾

ADCSOCAO (O)

ADCSOCBO (O)

Reserved⁽²⁾

(1) This table pertains to the 2808 device. Some peripherals may not be available in the 2809, 2806, 2802, or 2801 devices. See the pin

descriptions for more detail.

(2) The word "Reserved" means that there is no peripheral assigned to this GPxMUX1/2 register setting. Should it be selected, the state of

the pin will be undefined and the pin may be driven. This selection is a reserved configuration for future expansion.

(3) GPxMUX1/2 refers to the appropriate MUX register for the pin; GPAMUX1, GPAMUX2 or GPBMUX1.

106 Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

The user can select the type of input qualification for each GPIO pin via the GPxQSEL1/2 registers from four

choices:

•

Synchronization To SYSCLKOUT Only (GPxQSEL1/2 = 0,0): This is the default mode of all GPIO pins at

reset and it simply synchronizes the input signal to the system clock (SYSCLKOUT).

•

Qualification Using Sampling Window (GPxQSEL1/2 = 0,1 and 1,0): In this mode the input signal, after

synchronization to the system clock (SYSCLKOUT), is qualified by a specified number of cycles before the

input is allowed to change.

Time Between Samples

GPyCTRL Reg

Input Signal

Qualified by

3 or 6 Samples

Qualification

GPIOx

SYNC

GPxQSEL

SYSCLKOUT

Number of Samples

Figure 9-17. Qualification Using Sampling Window

•

The sampling period is specified by the QUALPRD bits in the GPxCTRL register and is configurable in

groups of 8 signals. It specifies a multiple of SYSCLKOUT cycles for sampling the input signal. The sampling

window is either 3-samples or 6-samples wide and the output is only changed when ALL samples are the

same (all 0s or all 1s) as shown in Figure 8-10 (for 6-sample mode).

No Synchronization (GPxQSEL1/2 = 1,1): This mode is used for peripherals where synchronization is not

required (synchronization is performed within the peripheral).

Due to the multi-level multiplexing that is required on the 280x device, there may be cases where a peripheral

input signal can be mapped to more then one GPIO pin. Also, when an input signal is not selected, the input

signal will default to either a 0 or 1 state, depending on the peripheral.

Submit Document Feedback 107

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.3 Memory Maps

Block Start

Address

Prog Space

Data Space

0x00 0000

M0 Vector − RAM (32 x 32)

(Enabled if VMAP = 0)

0x00 0040

M0 SARAM (1K y 16)

M1 SARAM (1K y 16)

0x00 0400

0x00 0800

Peripheral Frame 0

0x00 0D00

PIE Vector − RAM

(256 x 16)

(Enabled if ENPIE = 1)

Reserved

0x00 0E00

0x00 6000

Reserved

Peripheral Frame 1

(protected)

Reserved

0x00 7000

0x00 8000

Peripheral Frame 2

(protected)

L0 SARAM (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

0x00 9000

0x00 A000

0x00 C000

L1 SARAM (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

H0 SARAM (0-wait)

(8K y 16, Dual-Mapped)

Reserved

0x3D 7800

OTP

(1K y 16, Secure Zone)

0x3D 7C00

0x3D 8000

Reserved

FLASH

(128K y 16, Secure Zone)

0x3F 7FF8

0x3F 8000

128-bit Password

L0 SARAM (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

0x3F 9000

0x3F A000

L1 SARAM (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

H0 SARAM (0-wait)

(8K y 16, Dual-Mapped)

0x3F C000

0x3F F000

Reserved

Boot ROM (4K y 16)

0x3F FFC0

Vectors (32 y 32)

(enabled if VMAP = 1, ENPIE = 0)

A. Memory blocks are not to scale.

B. Peripheral Frame 0, Peripheral Frame 1, and Peripheral Frame 2 memory maps are restricted to data memory only. User program

cannot access these memory maps in program space.

C. Protected means the order of Write followed by Read operations is preserved rather than the pipeline order.

D. Certain memory ranges are EALLOW protected against spurious writes after configuration.

Figure 9-18. F2809 Memory Map

108 Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Block Start

Address

Prog Space

M0 Vector − RAM (32 x 32)

Data Space

0x00 0000

(Enabled if VMAP = 0)

0x00 0040

0x00 0400

0x00 0800

M0 SARAM (1K y 16)

M1 SARAM (1K y 16)

Peripheral Frame 0

0x00 0D00

PIE Vector − RAM

(256 x 16)

(Enabled if ENPIE = 1)

Reserved

0x00 0E00

0x00 6000

Reserved

Peripheral Frame 1

(protected)

Reserved

0x00 7000

0x00 8000

Peripheral Frame 2

(protected)

L0 SARAM (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

0x00 9000

0x00 A000

0x00 C000

L1 SARAM (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

H0 SARAM (0-wait)

(8K y 16, Dual-Mapped)

Reserved

0x3D 7800

0x3D 7C00

OTP

(1K y 16, Secure Zone)

Reserved

0x3E 8000

FLASH

(64K y 16, Secure Zone)

0x3F 7FF8

0x3F 8000

128-bit Password

L0 SARAM (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

0x3F 9000

0x3F A000

L1 SARAM (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

H0 SARAM (0-wait)

(8K y 16, Dual-Mapped)

0x3F C000

0x3F F000

Reserved

Boot ROM (4K y 16)

0x3F FFC0

Vectors (32 y 32)

(enabled if VMAP = 1, ENPIE = 0)

A. Memory blocks are not to scale.

B. Peripheral Frame 0, Peripheral Frame 1, and Peripheral Frame 2 memory maps are restricted to data memory only. User program

cannot access these memory maps in program space.

C. Protected means the order of Write followed by Read operations is preserved rather than the pipeline order.

D. Certain memory ranges are EALLOW protected against spurious writes after configuration.

Figure 9-19. F2808 Memory Map

Submit Document Feedback 109

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Block Start

Address

Data Space

Prog Space

0x00 0000

M0 Vector − RAM (32 x 32)

(Enabled if VMAP = 0)

0x00 0040

0x00 0400

M0 SARAM (1K y 16)

M1 SARAM (1K y 16)

0x00 0800

0x00 0D00

Peripheral Frame 0

PIE Vector − RAM

(256 x 16)

(Enabled if ENPIE = 1)

Reserved

0x00 0E00

0x00 6000

Reserved

Peripheral Frame 1

(protected)

0x00 7000

0x00 8000

Reserved

Peripheral Frame 2

(protected)

L0 SARAM (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

0x00 9000

0x00 A000

L1 SARAM (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

Reserved

0x3D 7800

0x3D 7C00

OTP

(1K y 16, Secure Zone)

Reserved

0x3F 0000

FLASH

(32K y 16, Secure Zone)

0x3F 7FF8

0x3F 8000

128-bit Password

L0 SARAM (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

0x3F 9000

0x3F A000

L1 SARAM (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

Reserved

0x3F F000

0x3F FFC0

Boot ROM (4K y 16)

Vectors (32 y 32)

(enabled if VMAP = 1, ENPIE = 0)

A. Memory blocks are not to scale.

B. Peripheral Frame 0, Peripheral Frame 1, and Peripheral Frame 2 memory maps are restricted to data memory only. User program

cannot access these memory maps in program space.

C. Protected means the order of Write followed by Read operations is preserved rather than the pipeline order.

D. Certain memory ranges are EALLOW protected against spurious writes after configuration.

Figure 9-20. F2806 Memory Map

110

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Block Start

Address

Data Space

Prog Space

0x00 0000

M0 Vector − RAM (32 x 32)

(Enabled if VMAP = 0)

M0 SARAM (1K y 16)

M1 SARAM (1K y 16)

0x00 0040

0x00 0400

0x00 0800

Peripheral Frame 0

0x00 0D00

PIE Vector − RAM

(256 x 16)

(Enabled if ENPIE = 1)

Reserved

0x00 0E00

0x00 6000

Reserved

Peripheral Frame 1

(protected)

Reserved

0x00 7000

0x00 8000

0x00 9000

Peripheral Frame 2

(protected)

L0 SARAM (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

Reserved

0x3D 7800

0x3D 7C00

(A)

OTP (F2802 Only)

(1K y 16, Secure Zone)

Reserved

0x3F 0000

FLASH (F2802) or ROM (C2802)

(32K y 16, Secure Zone)

0x3F 7FF8

0x3F 8000

128-bit Password

L0 (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

0x3F 9000

Reserved

0x3F F000

0x3F FFC0

Boot ROM (4K y 16)

Vectors (32 y 32)

(enabled if VMAP = 1, ENPIE = 0)

A. The 1K x 16 OTP has been replaced with 1K x 16 ROM in C2802.

B. Memory blocks are not to scale.

C. Peripheral Frame 0, Peripheral Frame 1, and Peripheral Frame 2 memory maps are restricted to data memory only. User program

cannot access these memory maps in program space.

D. Protected means the order of Write followed by Read operations is preserved rather than the pipeline order.

E. Certain memory ranges are EALLOW protected against spurious writes after configuration.

F. Some locations in ROM are reserved for TI. See Table 9-22 for more information.

Figure 9-21. F2802, C2802 Memory Map

Submit Document Feedback

111

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Block Start

Address

Data Space

Prog Space

0x00 0000

M0 Vector − RAM (32 x 32)

(Enabled if VMAP = 0)

M0 SARAM (1K y 16)

M1 SARAM (1K y 16)

0x00 0040

0x00 0400

0x00 0800

Peripheral Frame 0

0x00 0D00

PIE Vector − RAM

(256 x 16)

(Enabled if ENPIE = 1)

Reserved

0x00 0E00

0x00 6000

Reserved

Peripheral Frame 1

(protected)

Reserved

0x00 7000

0x00 8000

0x00 9000

Peripheral Frame 2

(protected)

L0 SARAM (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

Reserved

0x3D 7800

0x3D 7C00

(A)

OTP (F2801/F2801x Only)

(1K y 16, Secure Zone)

Reserved

0x3F 4000

FLASH (F2801) or ROM (C2801)

(16K y 16, Secure Zone)

0x3F 7FF8

0x3F 8000

128-bit Password

L0 (0-wait)

(4K y 16, Secure Zone, Dual-Mapped)

0x3F 9000

Reserved

0x3F F000

0x3F FFC0

Boot ROM (4K y 16)

Vectors (32 y 32)

(enabled if VMAP = 1, ENPIE = 0)

A. The 1K x 16 OTP has been replaced with 1K x 16 ROM in C2801.

B. Memory blocks are not to scale.

C. Peripheral Frame 0, Peripheral Frame 1, and Peripheral Frame 2 memory maps are restricted to data memory only. User program

cannot access these memory maps in program space.

D. Protected means the order of Write followed by Read operations is preserved rather than the pipeline order.

E. Certain memory ranges are EALLOW protected against spurious writes after configuration.

F. Some locations in ROM are reserved for TI. See Table 9-22 for more information.

Figure 9-22. F2801, F28015, F28016, C2801 Memory Map

Table 9-18. Addresses of Flash Sectors in F2809

ADDRESS RANGE

PROGRAM AND DATA SPACE

0x3D 8000 – 0x3D BFFF

Sector H (16K x 16)

112

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Table 9-18. Addresses of Flash Sectors in F2809 (continued)

ADDRESS RANGE

0x3D C000 – 0x3D FFFF

0x3E 0000 – 0x3E 3FFF

0x3E 4000 – 0x3E 7FFF

0x3E 8000 – 0x3E BFFF

0x3E C000 – 0x3E FFFF

0x3F 0000 – 0x3F 3FFF

0x3F 4000 – 0x3F 7F7F

PROGRAM AND DATA SPACE

Sector G (16K x 16)

Sector F (16K x 16)

Sector E (16K x 16)

Sector D (16K x 16)

Sector C (16K x 16)

Sector B (16K x 16)

Sector A (16K x 16)

Program to 0x0000 when using the

Code Security Module

0x3F 7F80 – 0x3F 7FF5

0x3F 7FF6 – 0x3F 7FF7

0x3F 7FF8 – 0x3F 7FFF

Boot-to-Flash Entry Point

(program branch instruction here)

Security Password (128-Bit)

(Do not program to all zeros)

Table 9-19. Addresses of Flash Sectors in F2808

ADDRESS RANGE

0x3E 8000 – 0x3E BFFF

0x3E C000 – 0x3E FFFF

0x3F 0000 – 0x3F 3FFF

0x3F 4000 – 0x3F 7F7F

PROGRAM AND DATA SPACE

Sector D (16K x 16)

Sector C (16K x 16)

Sector B (16K x 16)

Sector A (16K x 16)

Program to 0x0000 when using the

Code Security Module

0x3F 7F80 – 0x3F 7FF5

0x3F 7FF6 – 0x3F 7FF7

0x3F 7FF8 – 0x3F 7FFF

Boot-to-Flash Entry Point

(program branch instruction here)

Security Password (128-Bit)

(Do not program to all zeros)

Table 9-20. Addresses of Flash Sectors in F2806, F2802

ADDRESS RANGE

0x3F 0000 – 0x3F 1FFF

0x3F 2000 – 0x3F 3FFF

0x3F 4000 – 0x3F 5FFF

0x3F 6000 – 0x3F 7F7F

PROGRAM AND DATA SPACE

Sector D (8K x 16)

Sector C (8K x 16)

Sector B (8K x 16)

Sector A (8K x 16)

Program to 0x0000 when using the

Code Security Module

0x3F 7F80 – 0x3F 7FF5

0x3F 7FF6 – 0x3F 7FF7

0x3F 7FF8 – 0x3F 7FFF

Boot-to-Flash Entry Point

(program branch instruction here)

Security Password (128-Bit)

(Do not program to all zeros)

Submit Document Feedback

113

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Table 9-21. Addresses of Flash Sectors in F2801, F28015, F28016

ADDRESS RANGE

0x3F 4000 – 0x3F 4FFF

0x3F 5000 – 0x3F 5FFF

0x3F 6000 – 0x3F 6FFF

0x3F 7000 – 0x3F 7F7F

PROGRAM AND DATA SPACE

Sector D (4K x 16)

Sector C (4K x 16)

Sector B (4K x 16)

Sector A (4K x 16)

Program to 0x0000 when using the

Code Security Module

0x3F 7F80 – 0x3F 7FF5

0x3F 7FF6 – 0x3F 7FF7

0x3F 7FF8 – 0x3F 7FFF

Boot-to-Flash Entry Point

(program branch instruction here)

Security Password (128-Bit)

(Do not program to all zeros)

Note

•

When the code-security passwords are programmed, all addresses between 0x3F7F80 and

0x3F7FF5 cannot be used as program code or data. These locations must be programmed to

0x0000.

If the code security feature is not used, addresses 0x3F7F80 through 0x3F7FEF may be used for

code or data. Addresses 0x3F7FF0 – 0x3F7FF5 are reserved for data and should not contain

program code.

On ROM devices, addresses 0x3F7FF0 – 0x3F7FF5 and 0x3D7BFC – 0x3D7BFF are reserved for

TI, irrespective of whether code security has been used or not. User application should not use

these locations in any way.

Table 9-22 shows how to handle these memory locations.

Table 9-22. Impact of Using the Code Security Module

FLASH

ROM

ADDRESS

Code security enabled Code security disabled Code security enabled Code security disabled

0x3F 7F80 – 0x3F 7FEF

0x3F 7FF0 – 0x3F 7FF5

0x3D 7BFC – 0x3D 7BFF

Application code and data

Reserved for data only

Fill with 0x0000

Application code and data

Fill with 0x0000

Reserved for TI. Do not use.

Application code and data

Peripheral Frame 1 and Peripheral Frame 2 are grouped together so as to enable these blocks to be write/read

peripheral block protected. The protected mode ensures that all accesses to these blocks happen as written.

Because of the C28x pipeline, a write immediately followed by a read, to different memory locations, will appear

in reverse order on the memory bus of the CPU. This can cause problems in certain peripheral applications

where the user expected the write to occur first (as written). The C28x CPU supports a block protection mode

where a region of memory can be protected so as to make sure that operations occur as written (the penalty is

extra cycles are added to align the operations). This mode is programmable and by default, it will protect the

selected zones.

114

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

The wait-states for the various spaces in the memory map area are listed in Table 9-23.

Table 9-23. Wait-states

AREA

WAIT-STATES

COMMENTS

M0 and M1 SARAMs

Peripheral Frame 0

0-wait

Fixed

0-wait

0-wait (writes) Fixed. The eCAN peripheral can extend a cycle as

2-wait (reads) needed. Back-to-back writes will introduce a 1-cycle delay.

Peripheral Frame 1

0-wait (writes)

Fixed

Peripheral Frame 2

L0 and L1 SARAMs

2-wait (reads)

0-wait

Programmed via the Flash registers. 1-wait-state

Programmable,

OTP

operation is possible at a reduced CPU frequency. See

1-wait minimum

Section 9.1.5 for more information.

Programmed via the Flash registers. 0-wait-state

Programmable, operation is possible at reduced CPU frequency. The CSM

0-wait minimum password locations are hardwired for 16 wait-states. See

Section 9.1.5 for more information.

Flash

H0 SARAM

Boot-ROM

0-wait

1-wait

Fixed

Submit Document Feedback

115

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.4 Register Map

The 280x devices contain three peripheral register spaces. The spaces are categorized as follows:

Peripheral

Frame 0:

These are peripherals that are mapped directly to the CPU memory bus.

See Table 9-24.

Peripheral

Frame 1

These are peripherals that are mapped to the 32-bit peripheral bus.

See Table 9-25 .

Peripheral

Frame 2:

These are peripherals that are mapped to the 16-bit peripheral bus.

See Table 9-26 .

Table 9-24. Peripheral Frame 0 Registers

NAME^{(1) (2)}

ADDRESS RANGE

SIZE (x16)

ACCESS TYPE⁽³⁾

Device Emulation Registers

0x0880 – 0x09FF

384

EALLOW protected

CSM Protected

FLASH Registers⁽⁴⁾

0x0A80 – 0x0ADF

96

Code Security Module Registers

ADC Result Registers (dual-mapped)

CPU-TIMER0/1/2 Registers

PIE Registers

0x0AE0 – 0x0AEF

0x0B00 – 0x0B0F

0x0C00 – 0x0C3F

0x0CE0 – 0x0CFF

0x0D00 – 0x0DFF

16

EALLOW protected

Not EALLOW protected

EALLOW protected

64

32

PIE Vector Table

256

(1) Registers in Frame 0 support 16-bit and 32-bit accesses.

(2) Missing segments of memory space are reserved and should not be used in applications.

(3) If registers are EALLOW protected, then writes cannot be performed until the EALLOW instruction is executed. The EDIS instruction

disables writes to prevent stray code or pointers from corrupting register contents.

(4) The Flash Registers are also protected by the Code Security Module (CSM).

116

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Table 9-25. Peripheral Frame 1 Registers

NAME^{(1) (2)}

ADDRESS RANGE

0x6000 – 0x60FF

0x6100 – 0x61FF

0x6200 – 0x62FF

SIZE (x16)

ACCESS TYPE

Some eCAN control registers (and selected

bits in other eCAN control registers) are

EALLOW-protected.

eCANA Registers

eCANA Mailbox RAM

eCANB Registers

256

Not EALLOW-protected

Some eCAN control registers (and selected

bits in other eCAN control registers) are

EALLOW-protected.

256

eCANB Mailbox RAM

ePWM1 Registers

0x6300 – 0x63FF

0x6800 – 0x683F

0x6840 – 0x687F

0x6880 – 0x68BF

0x68C0 – 0x68FF

0x6900 – 0x693F

0x6940 – 0x697F

0x6A00 – 0x6A1F

0x6A20 – 0x6A3F

0x6A40 – 0x6A5F

0x6A60 – 0x6A7F

0x6B00 – 0x6B3F

0x6B40 – 0x6B7F

0x6F80 – 0x6FBF

0x6FC0 – 0x6FDF

0x6FE0 – 0x6FFF

256

64

32

64

128

32

Not EALLOW-protected

ePWM2 Registers

ePWM3 Registers

Some ePWM registers are EALLOW

protected. See Table 9-3.

ePWM4 Registers

ePWM5 Registers

ePWM6 Registers

eCAP1 Registers

eCAP2 Registers

eCAP3 Registers

Not EALLOW protected

eCAP4 Registers

eQEP1 Registers

eQEP2 Registers

GPIO Control Registers

GPIO Data Registers

GPIO Interrupt and LPM Select Registers

EALLOW protected

Not EALLOW protected

EALLOW protected

(1) The eCAN control registers only support 32-bit read/write operations. All 32-bit accesses are aligned to even address boundaries.

(2) Missing segments of memory space are reserved and should not be used in applications.

Table 9-26. Peripheral Frame 2 Registers

NAME^{(1) (2)}

System Control Registers

SPI-A Registers

ADDRESS RANGE

0x7010 – 0x702F

0x7040 – 0x704F

0x7050 – 0x705F

0x7070 – 0x707F

0x7100 – 0x711F

0x7740 – 0x774F

0x7750 – 0x775F

0x7760 – 0x776F

0x7780 – 0x778F

0x7900 – 0x792F

SIZE (x16)

ACCESS TYPE

32

16

32

16

48

EALLOW Protected

SCI-A Registers

External Interrupt Registers

ADC Registers

SPI-B Registers

Not EALLOW Protected

SCI-B Registers

SPI-C Registers

SPI-D Registers

I2C Registers

(1) Peripheral Frame 2 only allows 16-bit accesses. All 32-bit accesses are ignored (invalid data may be returned or written).

(2) Missing segments of memory space are reserved and should not be used in applications.

Submit Document Feedback

117

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.4.1 Device Emulation Registers

These registers are used to control the protection mode of the C28x CPU and to monitor some critical device

signals. The registers are defined in Table 9-27.

Table 9-27. Device Emulation Registers

ADDRESS

RANGE

NAME

SIZE (x16)

DESCRIPTION

0x0880

0x0881

DEVICECNF

PARTID

2

1

Device Configuration Register

0x0882

Part ID Register

0x002C⁽¹⁾- F2801

0x0024 – F2802

0x0034 – F2806

0x003C – F2808

0x00FE – F2809

0x0014 – F28016

0x001C – F28015

0xFF2C – C2801

0xFF24 – C2802

REVID

0x0883

1

Revision ID Register

0x0000 – Silicon Rev. 0 – TMX

0x0001 – Silicon Rev. A – TMX

0x0002 – Silicon Rev. B – TMS

0x0003 – Silicon Rev. C – TMS

0x0000 – Silicon rev. 0 – TMS (F2809 only)

0x0001 – Silicon rev. A – TMS (F2809 only)

PROTSTART

PROTRANGE

0x0884

0x0885

1

Block Protection Start Address Register

Block Protection Range Address Register

(1) The first byte (00) denotes flash devices. FF denotes ROM devices. Other values are reserved for future devices.

118

Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.5 Interrupts

Figure 9-23 shows how the various interrupt sources are multiplexed within the 280x devices.

Eight PIE block interrupts are grouped into one CPU interrupt. In total, 12 CPU interrupt groups, with 8 interrupts

per group equals 96 possible interrupts. On the 280x, 43 of these are used by peripherals as shown in Table

9-28.

The TRAP #VectorNumber instruction transfers program control to the interrupt service routine corresponding to

the vector specified. TRAP #0 attempts to transfer program control to the address pointed to by the reset vector.

The PIE vector table does not, however, include a reset vector. Therefore, TRAP #0 should not be used when

the PIE is enabled. Doing so will result in undefined behavior.

When the PIE is enabled, TRAP #1 through TRAP #12 will transfer program control to the interrupt service

routine corresponding to the first vector within the PIE group. For example: TRAP #1 fetches the vector from

INT1.1, TRAP #2 fetches the vector from INT2.1 and so forth.

Submit Document Feedback

119

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Peripherals

(SPI, SCI, I2C, eCAN, ePWM, eCAP, eQEP, ADC)

WDINT

Watchdog

Low-Power Modes

WAKEINT

LPMINT

XINT1

Interrupt Control

XINT1CR(15:0)

XINT1CTR(15:0)

INT1

to

INT12

GPIOXINT1SEL(4:0)

XINT2SOC

ADC

XINT2

Interrupt Control

XINT2CR(15:0)

XINT2CTR(15:0)

C28x

CPU

GPIOXINT2SEL(4:0)

TINT0

TINT2

TINT1

CPU TIMER 0

INT14

INT13

CPU TIMER 2 (Reserved for SYS/BIOS)

CPU TIMER 1

int13_select

nmi_select

GPIO0.int

XNMI_XINT13

GPIO

MUX

Interrupt Control

XNMICR(15:0)

XNMICTR(15:0)

NMI

GPIO31.int

1

GPIOXNMISEL(4:0)

Figure 9-23. External and PIE Interrupt Sources

120 Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

IFR[12:1]

IER[12:1]

INTM

INT1

INT2

1

CPU

MUX

0

INT11

INT12

Global

Enable

(Flag)

(Enable)

INTx.1

INTx.2

INTx.3

INTx.4

INTx.5

From

Peripherals

or

External

Interrupts

INTx

MUX

INTx.6

INTx.7

INTx.8

PIEACKx

(Enable)

(Flag)

(Enable/Flag)

PIEIERx[8:1]

PIEIFRx[8:1]

Figure 9-24. Multiplexing of Interrupts Using the PIE Block

Table 9-28. PIE Peripheral Interrupts

CPU

PIE INTERRUPTS

INTERRUPTS

(1)

INTx.8

INTx.7

INTx.6

INTx.5

INTx.4

INTx.3

INTx.2

INTx.1

WAKEINT

(LPM/WD)

TINT0

(TIMER 0)

ADCINT⁽²⁾

(ADC)

SEQ2INT

(ADC)

SEQ1INT

(ADC)

INT1

INT2

INT3

INT4

INT5

XINT2

XINT1

Reserved

EPWM6_TZINT EPWM5_TZINT EPWM4_TZINT EPWM3_TZINT EPWM2_TZINT EPWM1_TZINT

(ePWM6)

Reserved

(ePWM5)

(ePWM4)

(ePWM3)

(ePWM2)

(ePWM1)

EPWM6_INT

(ePWM6)

EPWM5_INT

(ePWM5)

EPWM4_INT

(ePWM4)

EPWM3_INT

(ePWM3)

EPWM2_INT

(ePWM2)

EPWM1_INT

(ePWM1)

ECAP4_INT

(eCAP4)

ECAP3_INT

(eCAP3)

ECAP2_INT

(eCAP2)

ECAP1_INT

(eCAP1)

Reserved

EQEP2_INT

(eQEP2)

EQEP1_INT

(eQEP1)

Reserved

SPITXINTD

(SPI-D)

SPIRXINTD

(SPI-D)

SPITXINTC

(SPI-C)

SPIRXINTC

(SPI-C)

SPITXINTB

(SPI-B)

SPIRXINTB

(SPI-B)

SPITXINTA

(SPI-A)

SPIRXINTA

(SPI-A)

INT6

INT7

INT8

Reserved

I2CINT2A

(I2C-A)

I2CINT1A

(I2C-A)

ECAN1_INTB

(CAN-B)

ECAN0_INTB

(CAN-B)

ECAN1_INTA

(CAN-A)

ECAN0_INTA

(CAN-A)

SCITXINTB

(SCI-B)

SCIRXINTB

(SCI-B)

SCITXINTA

(SCI-A)

SCIRXINTA

(SCI-A)

INT9

INT10

INT11

INT12

Reserved

(1) Out of the 96 possible interrupts, 43 interrupts are currently used. The remaining interrupts are reserved for future devices. These

interrupts can be used as software interrupts if they are enabled at the PIEIFRx level, provided none of the interrupts within the group

is being used by a peripheral. Otherwise, interrupts coming in from peripherals may be lost by accidentally clearing their flag while

modifying the PIEIFR. To summarize, there are two safe cases when the reserved interrupts could be used as software interrupts:

1) No peripheral within the group is asserting interrupts.

2) No peripheral interrupts are assigned to the group (example PIE group 12).

(2) ADCINT is sourced as a logical "OR" of both the SEQ1INT and SEQ2INT signals. This is to support backward compatibility with the

implementation found on the TMS320F281x series of devices, where SEQ1INT and SEQ2INT did not exist, only ADCINT. For new

implementations, TI recommends using SEQ1INT and SEQ2INT and not enabling ADCINT in the PIEIER register.

Submit Document Feedback 121

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Table 9-29. PIE Configuration and Control Registers

NAME

PIECTRL

ADDRESS

0x0CE0

0x0CE1

0x0CE2

0x0CE3

0x0CE4

0x0CE5

0x0CE6

0x0CE7

0x0CE8

0x0CE9

0x0CEA

0x0CEB

0x0CEC

0x0CED

0x0CEE

0x0CEF

0x0CF0

0x0CF1

0x0CF2

0x0CF3

0x0CF4

0x0CF5

0x0CF6

0x0CF7

0x0CF8

0x0CF9

SIZE (x16)

DESCRIPTION⁽¹⁾

1

6

PIE, Control Register

PIEACK

PIEIER1

PIEIFR1

PIEIER2

PIEIFR2

PIEIER3

PIEIFR3

PIEIER4

PIEIFR4

PIEIER5

PIEIFR5

PIEIER6

PIEIFR6

PIEIER7

PIEIFR7

PIEIER8

PIEIFR8

PIEIER9

PIEIFR9

PIEIER10

PIEIFR10

PIEIER11

PIEIFR11

PIEIER12

PIEIFR12

Reserved

PIE, Acknowledge Register

PIE, INT1 Group Enable Register

PIE, INT1 Group Flag Register

PIE, INT2 Group Enable Register

PIE, INT2 Group Flag Register

PIE, INT3 Group Enable Register

PIE, INT3 Group Flag Register

PIE, INT4 Group Enable Register

PIE, INT4 Group Flag Register

PIE, INT5 Group Enable Register

PIE, INT5 Group Flag Register

PIE, INT6 Group Enable Register

PIE, INT6 Group Flag Register

PIE, INT7 Group Enable Register

PIE, INT7 Group Flag Register

PIE, INT8 Group Enable Register

PIE, INT8 Group Flag Register

PIE, INT9 Group Enable Register

PIE, INT9 Group Flag Register

PIE, INT10 Group Enable Register

PIE, INT10 Group Flag Register

PIE, INT11 Group Enable Register

PIE, INT11 Group Flag Register

PIE, INT12 Group Enable Register

PIE, INT12 Group Flag Register

Reserved

0x0CFA –

0x0CFF

(1) The PIE configuration and control registers are not protected by EALLOW mode. The PIE vector

table is protected.

122 Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.5.1 External Interrupts

Table 9-30. External Interrupt Registers

NAME

XINT1CR

XINT2CR

Reserved

XNMICR

ADDRESS

SIZE (x16)

DESCRIPTION

0x7070

1

5

1

5

1

XINT1 control register

0x7071

XINT2 control register

Reserved

0x7072 – 0x7076

0x7077

XNMI control register

XINT1 counter register

XINT2 counter register

Reserved

XINT1CTR

XINT2CTR

Reserved

XNMICTR

0x7078

0x7079

0x707A – 0x707E

0x707F

XNMI counter register

Each external interrupt can be enabled/disabled or qualified using positive, negative, or both positive and

negative edge. For more information, see the TMS320x280x, 2801x, 2804x DSP system control and interrupts

reference guide.

Submit Document Feedback 123

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.6 System Control

This section describes the 280x oscillator, PLL and clocking mechanisms, the watchdog function and the low

power modes. Figure 9-25 shows the various clock and reset domains in the 280x devices that will be discussed.

Reset

XRS

Watchdog

Block

SYSCLKOUT^(A)

Peripheral Reset

CLKIN^(A)

X1

28x

CPU

PLL

OSC

X2

Power

Modes

Control

XCLKIN

Peripheral

Registers

CPU

Timers

System

Control

Registers

Clock Enables

Peripheral

Registers

ePWM 1/2/3/4/5/6

eCAP 1/2/3/4 eQEP 1/2

I/O

Peripheral

Registers

eCAN-A/B

I2C-A

GPIO

MUX

GPIOs

Low-Speed Prescaler

LSPCLK

Peripheral

Registers

Low-Speed Peripherals

SCI-A/B, SPI-A/B/C/D

High-Speed Prescaler

HSPCLK

ADC

Registers

12-Bit ADC

16 ADC Inputs

A. CLKIN is the clock into the CPU. It is passed out of the CPU as SYSCLKOUT (that is, CLKIN is the same frequency as SYSCLKOUT).

Figure 9-25. Clock and Reset Domains

124 Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

The PLL, clocking, watchdog and low-power modes, are controlled by the registers listed in Table 9-31.

Table 9-31. PLL, Clocking, Watchdog, and Low-Power Mode Registers

NAME⁽¹⁾

XCLK

ADDRESS

SIZE (x16)

DESCRIPTION

XCLKOUT Pin Control, X1 and XCLKIN Status Register

PLL Status Register

0x7010

1

8

1

3

1

6

PLLSTS

Reserved

HISPCP

LOSPCP

PCLKCR0

PCLKCR1

LPMCR0

Reserved

PLLCR

0x7011

0x7012 – 0x7019

0x701A

Reserved

High-Speed Peripheral Clock Prescaler Register (for HSPCLK)

Low-Speed Peripheral Clock Prescaler Register (for LSPCLK)

Peripheral Clock Control Register 0

Peripheral Clock Control Register 1

Low-Power Mode Control Register 0

Reserved

0x701B

0x701C

0x701D

0x701E

0x701F – 0x7020

0x7021

PLL Control Register

SCSR

0x7022

System Control and Status Register

Watchdog Counter Register

Reserved

WDCNTR

Reserved

WDKEY

Reserved

WDCR

0x7023

0x7024

0x7025

Watchdog Reset Key Register

Reserved

0x7026 – 0x7028

0x7029

Watchdog Control Register

Reserved

0x702A – 0x702F

Reserved

(1) All of the registers in this table are EALLOW protected.

Submit Document Feedback 125

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.6.1 OSC and PLL Block

Figure 9-26 shows the OSC and PLL block on the 280x.

OSCCLK

VCOCLK

OSCCLK

or

VCOCLK

XCLKIN

(3.3-V Clock Input)

0

n

XOR

CLKIN

PLLSTS[OSCOFF]

PLLSTS[PLLOFF]

PLL

n

0

/2

PLLSTS[CLKINDIV]

X1

On-Chip

Oscillator

4-bit PLL Select

(PLLCR)

X2

Figure 9-26. OSC and PLL Block Diagram

The on-chip oscillator circuit enables a crystal/resonator to be attached to the 280x devices using the X1 and X2

pins. If the on-chip oscillator is not used, an external oscillator can be used in either one of the following

configurations:

1. A 3.3-V external oscillator can be directly connected to the XCLKIN pin. The X2 pin should be left

unconnected and the X1 pin tied low. The logic-high level in this case should not exceed V_DDIO

2. A 1.8-V external oscillator can be directly connected to the X1 pin. The X2 pin should be left unconnected

and the XCLKIN pin tied low. The logic-high level in this case should not exceed V_DD

The three possible input-clock configurations are shown in Figure 9-27 through Figure 9-29.

.

XCLKIN

X1

X2

NC

External Clock Signal

(Toggling 0-V_DDIO

)

Figure 9-27. Using a 3.3-V External Oscillator

XCLKIN

X1

X2

External Clock Signal

)

NC

(Toggling 0-V_DD

Figure 9-28. Using a 1.8-V External Oscillator

XCLKIN

X1

X2

C_L1

C_L2

Crystal

Figure 9-29. Using the Internal Oscillator

126 Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.6.1.1 External Reference Oscillator Clock Option

The typical specifications for the external quartz crystal for a frequency of 20 MHz are listed below:

•

Fundamental mode, parallel resonant

C_L(load capacitance) = 12 pF

C_L1= C_L2= 24 pF

C_shunt= 6 pF

ESR range = 30 to 60 Ω

TI recommends that customers have the resonator/crystal vendor characterize the operation of their device with

the DSP chip. The resonator/crystal vendor has the equipment and expertise to tune the tank circuit. The vendor

can also advise the customer regarding the proper tank component values that will produce proper start up and

stability over the entire operating range.

9.6.1.2 PLL-Based Clock Module

The 280x devices have an on-chip, PLL-based clock module. This module provides all the necessary clocking

signals for the device, as well as control for low-power mode entry. The PLL has a 4-bit ratio control PLLCR[DIV]

to select different CPU clock rates. The watchdog module should be disabled before writing to the PLLCR

register. It can be re-enabled (if need be) after the PLL module has stabilized, which takes 131072 OSCCLK

cycles.

Table 9-32. PLLCR Register Bit Definitions

SYSCLKOUT

PLLCR[DIV]⁽¹⁾

(CLKIN)⁽²⁾

0000 (PLL bypass)

0001

OSCCLK/n

(OSCCLK*1)/n

(OSCCLK*2)/n

(OSCCLK*3)/n

(OSCCLK*4)/n

(OSCCLK*5)/n

(OSCCLK*6)/n

(OSCCLK*7)/n

(OSCCLK*8)/n

(OSCCLK*9)/n

(OSCCLK*10)/n

Reserved

0010

0011

0100

0101

0110

0111

1000

1001

1010

1011–1111

(1) This register is EALLOW protected.

(2) CLKIN is the input clock to the CPU. SYSCLKOUT is the output

clock from the CPU. The frequency of SYSCLKOUT is the same

as CLKIN. If CLKINDIV = 0, n = 2; if CLKINDIV = 1, n = 1.

Note

PLLSTS[CLKINDIV] enables or bypasses the divide-by-two block before the clock is fed to the core.

This bit must be 0 before writing to the PLLCR and must only be set after PLLSTS[PLLLOCKS] = 1.

Submit Document Feedback 127

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

The PLL-based clock module provides two modes of operation:

•

Crystal-operation - This mode allows the use of an external crystal/resonator to provide the time base to the

device.

•

External clock source operation - This mode allows the internal oscillator to be bypassed. The device clocks

are generated from an external clock source input on the X1 or the XCLKIN pin.

Table 9-33. Possible PLL Configuration Modes

PLLSTS[CLKINDIV

]

SYSCLKOUT

(CLKIN)

PLL MODE

REMARKS

Invoked by the user setting the PLLOFF bit in the PLLSTS register. The PLL block

is disabled in this mode. This can be useful to reduce system noise and for low

power operation. The PLLCR register must first be set to 0x0000 (PLL Bypass)

before entering this mode. The CPU clock (CLKIN) is derived directly from the

input clock on either X1/X2, X1 or XCLKIN.

0

OSCCLK/2

PLL Off

1

OSCCLK

PLL Bypass is the default PLL configuration upon power-up or after an external

reset ( XRS). This mode is selected when the PLLCR register is set to 0x0000 or

while the PLL locks to a new frequency after the PLLCR register has been

modified. In this mode, the PLL itself is bypassed but the PLL is not turned off.

0

1

OSCCLK/2

OSCCLK

PLL Bypass

PLL Enable

Achieved by writing a non-zero value n into the PLLCR register. Upon writing to the

PLLCR the device will switch to PLL Bypass mode until the PLL locks.

0

OSCCLK*n/2

9.6.1.3 Loss of Input Clock

In PLL-enabled and PLL-bypass mode, if the input clock OSCCLK is removed or absent, the PLL will still issue a

limp-mode clock. The limp-mode clock continues to clock the CPU and peripherals at a typical frequency of 1–

5 MHz. Limp mode is not specified to work from power-up, only after input clocks have been present initially. In

PLL bypass mode, the limp mode clock from the PLL is automatically routed to the CPU if the input clock is

removed or absent.

Normally, when the input clocks are present, the watchdog counter decrements to initiate a watchdog reset or

WDINT interrupt. However, when the external input clock fails, the watchdog counter stops decrementing (that is,

the watchdog counter does not change with the limp-mode clock). In addition to this, the device will be reset and

the “Missing Clock Status” (MCLKSTS) bit will be set. These conditions could be used by the application

firmware to detect the input clock failure and initiate necessary shut-down procedure for the system.

Note

Applications in which the correct CPU operating frequency is absolutely critical should implement a

mechanism by which the DSP will be held in reset, should the input clocks ever fail. For example, an

R-C circuit may be used to trigger the XRS pin of the DSP, should the capacitor ever get fully charged.

An I/O pin may be used to discharge the capacitor on a periodic basis to prevent it from getting fully

charged. Such a circuit would also help in detecting failure of the flash memory and the V_DD3VFLrail.

128 Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.6.2 Watchdog Block

The watchdog block on the 280x is similar to the one used on the 240x and 281x devices. The watchdog module

generates an output pulse, 512 oscillator clocks wide (OSCCLK), whenever the 8-bit watchdog up counter has

reached its maximum value. To prevent this, the user disables the counter or the software must periodically write

a 0x55 + 0xAA sequence into the watchdog key register which will reset the watchdog counter. Figure 9-30

shows the various functional blocks within the watchdog module.

WDCR (WDPS[2:0])

WDCR (WDDIS)

WDCNTR[7:0]

OSCCLK

WDCLK

Watchdog

Prescaler

8-Bit

Watchdog

Counter

CLR

/512

Clear Counter

Internal

Pullup

WDKEY[7:0]

WDRST

WDINT

Generate

Output Pulse

(512 OSCCLKs)

Watchdog

55 + AA

Key Detector

Good Key

XRS

Bad

WDCHK

Key

Core-reset

SCSR (WDENINT)

WDCR (WDCHK[2:0])

WDRST^(A)

A. The WDRST signal is driven low for 512 OSCCLK cycles.

1

0

1

Figure 9-30. Watchdog Module

The WDINT signal enables the watchdog to be used as a wakeup from IDLE/STANDBY mode.

In STANDBY mode, all peripherals are turned off on the device. The only peripheral that remains functional is

the watchdog. The WATCHDOG module will run off OSCCLK. The WDINT signal is fed to the LPM block so that

it can wake the device from STANDBY (if enabled). See Section 9.7, Low-Power Modes Block, for more details.

In IDLE mode, the WDINT signal can generate an interrupt to the CPU, via the PIE, to take the CPU out of IDLE

mode.

In HALT mode, this feature cannot be used because the oscillator (and PLL) are turned off and hence so is the

WATCHDOG.

Submit Document Feedback 129

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

9.7 Low-Power Modes Block

The low-power modes on the 280x are similar to the 240x devices. Table 9-34 summarizes the various modes.

Table 9-34. Low-Power Modes

MODE

LPMCR0(1:0)

OSCCLK

CLKIN

SYSCLKOUT

EXIT⁽¹⁾

XRS, Watchdog interrupt, any enabled

interrupt, XNMI

IDLE

00

On

On⁽²⁾

On

XRS, Watchdog interrupt, GPIO Port A

signal, debugger⁽³⁾, XNMI

STANDBY

HALT

01

1X

Off

(watchdog still running)

Off

XRS, GPIO Port A signal, XNMI,

debugger⁽³⁾

(oscillator and PLL turned off,

watchdog not functional)

(1) The Exit column lists which signals or under what conditions the low power mode will be exited. A low signal, on any of the signals, will

exit the low power condition. This signal must be kept low long enough for an interrupt to be recognized by the device. Otherwise the

IDLE mode will not be exited and the device will go back into the indicated low power mode.

(2) The IDLE mode on the C28x behaves differently than on the 24x/240x. On the C28x, the clock output from the CPU (SYSCLKOUT) is

still functional while on the 24x/240x the clock is turned off.

(3) On the C28x, the JTAG port can still function even if the CPU clock (CLKIN) is turned off.

The various low-power modes operate as follows:

IDLE Mode:

This mode is exited by any enabled interrupt or an XNMI that is recognized by the processor. The

LPM block performs no tasks during this mode as long as the LPMCR0(LPM) bits are set to 0,0.

STANDBY Mode:

Any GPIO port A signal (GPIO[31:0]) can wake the device from STANDBY mode. The user must

select which signal(s) will wake the device in the GPIOLPMSEL register. The selected signal(s) are

also qualified by the OSCCLK before waking the device. The number of OSCCLKs is specified in the

LPMCR0 register.

HALT Mode:

Only the XRS and any GPIO port A signal (GPIO[31:0]) can wake the device from HALT mode. The

user selects the signal in the GPIOLPMSEL register.

Note

The low-power modes do not affect the state of the output pins (PWM pins included). They will be in

whatever state the code left them in when the IDLE instruction was executed. See the TMS320x280x,

2801x, 2804x DSP system control and interrupts reference guide for more details.

130 Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

10 Applications, Implementation, and Layout

Note

Information in the following applications sections is not part of the TI component specification, and TI

does not warrant its accuracy or completeness. TI’s customers are responsible for determining

suitability of components for their purposes. Customers should validate and test their design

implementation to confirm system functionality.

10.1 TI Design or Reference Design

TI Designs Reference Design Library is a robust reference design library spanning analog, embedded processor,

and connectivity. Created by TI experts to help you jump start your system design, all TI Designs include

schematic or block diagrams, BOMs, and design files to speed your time to market. Search and download

designs at TIDesigns.

Submit Document Feedback 131

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

11 Device and Documentation Support

11.1 Getting Started

This section gives a brief overview of the steps to take when first developing for a C28x device. For more detail

on each of these steps, see the following:

•

C2000 Real-Time Control MCUs – Getting started

C2000 Real-Time Control MCUs – Tools & software

Step 1. Acquire the appropriate development tools

The quickest way to begin working with a C28x device is to acquire an eZdsp^™kit for initial development, which,

in one package, includes:

•

On-board JTAG emulation via USB or parallel port

Appropriate emulation driver

Code Composer Studio^™IDE for eZdsp

Once you have become familiar with the device and begin developing on your own hardware, purchase Code

Composer Studio^™IDE separately for software development and a JTAG emulation tool to get started on your

project.

Step 2. Download starter software

To simplify programming for C28x devices, it is recommended that users download and use the C/C++ Header

Files and Example(s) to begin developing software for the C28x devices and their various peripherals.

After downloading the appropriate header file package for your device, refer to the following resources for step-

by-step instructions on how to run the peripheral examples and use the header file structure for your own

software

•

The Quick Start Readme in the /doc directory to run your first application.

Programming TMS320x28xx and 28xxx peripherals in C/C++ application report

Step 3. Download flash programming software

Many C28x devices include on-chip flash memory and tools that allow you to program the flash with your

software IP.

•

Flash Tools: C28x Flash Tools

TMS320F281x™ flash programming solutions

Running an application from internal flash memory on the TMS320F28xxx DSP

Step 4. Move on to more advanced topics

For more application software and other advanced topics, visit C2000 real-time control MCUs – Tools &

software.

132 Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

11.2 Device and Development Support Tool Nomenclature

To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all

TMS320^™DSP devices and support tools. Each TMS320™ DSP commercial family member has one of three

prefixes: TMX, TMP, or TMS (for example, TMS 320F2808). Texas Instruments recommends two of three

possible prefix designators for its support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary stages

of product development from engineering prototypes (TMX/TMDX) through fully qualified production devices/

tools (TMS/TMDS).

Device development evolutionary flow:

TMX

TMP

Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device's electrical specifications

Final silicon die that conforms to the device's electrical specifications but has not completed quality and reliability

verification

TMS

Fully qualified production device

Support tool development evolutionary flow:

TMDX

TMDS

Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal qualification testing

Fully qualified development-support product

TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped against the following disclaimer:

"Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes."

TMS devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and reliability

of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI's standard warranty applies.

Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard production

devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production system because their

expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are to be used.

TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the package type

(for example, PZ) and temperature range (for example, S). Figure 11-1 provides a legend for reading the

complete device name for any family member.

For device part numbers and further ordering information, see the Package Option Addendum of this document,

the TI website (www.ti.com), or contact your TI sales representative.

For additional description of the device nomenclature markings on the die, see the TMS320F280x,

TMS320C280x, TMS320F2801x DSPs silicon errata.

Submit Document Feedback 133

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Figure 11-1. Example of TMS320x280x/2801x Device Nomenclature

134 Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

11.3 Tools and Software

TI offers an extensive line of development tools. Some of the tools and software to evaluate the performance of

the device, generate code, and develop solutions are listed below. To view all available tools and software, visit

the Tools & software page for each device.

Software

C28x IQMath Library - A Virtual Floating Point Engine

Texas Instruments TMS320C28x IQmath Library is collection of highly optimized and high precision

mathematical Function Library for C/C++ programmers to seamlessly port the floating-point algorithm into fixed

point code on TMS320C28x devices. These routines are typically used in computationally intensive real-time

applications where optimal execution speed & high accuracy is critical. By using these routines you can achieve

execution speeds considerable faster than equivalent code written in standard ANSI C language. In addition, by

providing ready-to-use high precision functions, TI IQmath library can shorten significantly your DSP application

development time. (Please find the IQ Math User's Guide in the /docs folder once the file is extracted and

installed).

C280x, C2801x C/C++ Header Files and Peripheral Examples

This utility contains Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) for TMS320x280x and TMS320x280xx DSP devices. This

HAL facilitates peripheral configuration using "C". It also contains a simple test program for each peripheral to

exemplify the usage of HAL to control & configure the on-chip peripheral.

Development Tools

C2000 Gang Programmer

The C2000 Gang Programmer is a C2000 device programmer that can program up to eight identical C2000

devices at the same time. The C2000 Gang Programmer connects to a host PC using a standard RS-232 or

USB connection and provides flexible programming options that allow the user to fully customize the process.

Code Composer Studio^™(CCS) Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for C2000 Microcontrollers

Code Composer Studio is an integrated development environment (IDE) that supports TI's Microcontroller and

Embedded Processors portfolio. Code Composer Studio comprises a suite of tools used to develop and debug

embedded applications. It includes an optimizing C/C++ compiler, source code editor, project build environment,

debugger, profiler, and many other features. The intuitive IDE provides a single user interface taking the user

through each step of the application development flow. Familiar tools and interfaces allow users to get started

faster than ever before. Code Composer Studio combines the advantages of the Eclipse software framework

with advanced embedded debug capabilities from TI resulting in a compelling feature-rich development

environment for embedded developers.

Uniflash Standalone Flash Tool

CCS Uniflash is a standalone tool used to program on-chip flash memory on TI MCUs.

Models

Various models are available for download from the product Tools & Software pages. These include I/O Buffer

Information Specification (IBIS) Models and Boundary-Scan Description Language (BSDL) Models. To view all

available models, visit the Models section of the Tools & Software page for each device.

Submit Document Feedback 135

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

11.4 Documentation Support

To receive notification of documentation updates, navigate to the device product folder on ti.com. In the upper

right corner, click on Alert me to register and receive a weekly digest of any product information that has

changed. For change details, review the revision history included in any revised document.

The current documentation that describes the processor, related peripherals, and other technical collateral is

listed below.

Errata

TMS320F280x, TMS320C280x, TMS320F2801x DSPs silicon errata describes the advisories and usage notes

for different versions of silicon.

CPU User's Guides

TMS320C28x CPU and instruction set reference guide describes the central processing unit (CPU) and the

assembly language instructions of the TMS320C28x fixed-point digital signal processors (DSPs). It also

describes emulation features available on these DSPs.

TMS320x280x, 2801x, 2804x DSP system control and interrupts reference guide describes the various interrupts

and system control features of the 280x digital signal processors (DSPs).

Peripheral Guides

C2000 real-time control peripherals reference guide describes the peripheral reference guides of the 28x digital

signal processors (DSPs).

TMS320x280x, 2801x, 2804x DSP Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) reference guide describes how to

configure and use the on-chip ADC module, which is a 12-bit pipelined ADC.

TMS320x280x, 2801x, 2804x Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM) module reference guide describes the

main areas of the enhanced pulse width modulator that include digital motor control, switch mode power supply

control, UPS (uninterruptible power supplies), and other forms of power conversion.

TMS320x280x, 2801x, 2804x Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse (eQEP) module reference guide describes

the eQEP module, which is used for interfacing with a linear or rotary incremental encoder to get position,

direction, and speed information from a rotating machine in high performance motion and position control

systems. It includes the module description and registers.

TMS320x280x, 2801x, 2804x Enhanced Capture (eCAP) module reference guide describes the enhanced

capture module. It includes the module description and registers.

TMS320x280x, 2801x, 2804x High Resolution Pulse Width Modulator (HRPWM) reference guide describes the

operation of the high-resolution extension to the pulse width modulator (HRPWM).

TMS320x280x/2801x Enhanced Controller Area Network (eCAN) reference guide describes the enhanced

controller area network (eCAN) on the x280x and x2801x devices.

TMS320x280x, 2801x, 2804x Serial Communications Interface (SCI) reference guide describes the features and

operation of the serial communication interface (SCI) module that is available on the TMS320x280x, 2801x,

2804x devices.

TMS320x280x, 2801x, 2804x Serial Peripheral Interface reference guide describes how the serial peripheral

interface works.

TMS320x280x, 2801x, 2804x Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) module reference guide describes the features and

operation of the inter-integrated circuit (I2C) module.

TMS320x280x, 2801x, 2804x Boot ROM reference guide describes the purpose and features of the bootloader

(factory-programmed boot-loading software). It also describes other contents of the device on-chip boot ROM

and identifies where all of the information is located within that memory.

136 Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

Tools Guides

TMS320C28x Assembly language tools v18.12.0.LTS user's guide describes the assembly language tools

(assembler and other tools used to develop assembly language code), assembler directives, macros, common

object file format, and symbolic debugging directives for the TMS320C28x device.

TMS320C28x optimizing C/C++ compiler v18.12.0.LTS user's guide describes the TMS320C28x C/C++

compiler. This compiler accepts ANSI standard C/C++ source code and produces TMS320 DSP assembly

language source code for the TMS320C28x device.

TMS320C28x DSP/BIOS 5.x Application Programming Interface (API) reference guide describes development

using DSP/BIOS.

Application Reports

TMS320x281x to TMS320x2833x or 2823x migration overview describes how to migrate from the 281x device

design to 2833x or 2823x designs.

TMS320x280x to TMS320x2833x or 2823x migration overview describes how to migrate from a 280x device

design to 2833x or 2823x designs.

TMS320C28x FPU primer provides an overview of the floating-point unit (FPU) in the C2000™ Delfino

microcontroller devices.

Running an application from internal flash memory on the TMS320F28xxx DSP covers the requirements needed

to properly configure application software for execution from on-chip flash memory. Requirements for both DSP/

BIOS and non-DSP/BIOS projects are presented. Example code projects are included.

Programming TMS320x28xx and 28xxx peripherals in C/C++ explores a hardware abstraction layer

implementation to make C/C++ coding easier on 28x DSPs. This method is compared to traditional #define

macros and topics of code efficiency and special case registers are also addressed.

Using PWM output as a Digital-to-Analog Converter on a TMS320F280x Digital Signal Controller presents a

method for using the on-chip pulse width modulated (PWM) signal generators on the TMS320F280x family of

digital signal controllers as a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).

TMS320F280x digital signal controller USB connectivity using the TUSB3410 USB-to-UART bridge chip

presents hardware connections as well as software preparation and operation of the development system using

a simple communication echo program.

Using the Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse (eQEP) module in TMS320x280x, 28xxx as a dedicated capture

provides a guide for the use of the eQEP module as a dedicated capture unit and is applicable to the

TMS320x280x, 28xxx family of processors.

Using the ePWM module for 0% - 100% duty cycle control provides a guide for the use of the ePWM module to

provide 0% to 100% duty cycle control and is applicable to the TMS320x280x family of processors.

TMS320x280x and TMS320F2801x ADC calibration describes a method for improving the absolute accuracy of

the 12-bit ADC found on the TMS320x280x and TMS320F2801x devices. Inherent gain and offset errors affect

the absolute accuracy of the ADC. The methods described in this report can improve the absolute accuracy of

the ADC to levels better than 0.5%. This application report has an option to download an example program that

executes from RAM on the F2808 EzDSP.

Online stack overflow detection on the TMS320C28x DSP presents the methodology for online stack overflow

detection on the TMS320C28x DSP. C-source code is provided that contains functions for implementing the

overflow detection on both DSP/BIOS and non-DSP/BIOS applications.

TMS320x281x to TMS320x280x migration overview describes differences between the Texas Instruments

TMS320x281x and the TMS320x280x/2801x/2804x DSPs to assist in application migration.

Semiconductor packing methodology describes the packing methodologies employed to prepare semiconductor

devices for shipment to end users.

Submit Document Feedback 137

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

An introduction to IBIS (I/O Buffer Information Specification) modeling discusses various aspects of IBIS

including its history, advantages, compatibility, model generation flow, data requirements in modeling the input/

output structures and future trends.

Calculating useful lifetimes of embedded processors provides a methodology for calculating the useful lifetime of

TI embedded processors (EPs) under power when used in electronic systems. It is aimed at general engineers

who wish to determine if the reliability of the TI EP meets the end system reliability requirement.

Semiconductor and IC package thermal metrics describes traditional and new thermal metrics and puts their

application in perspective with respect to system-level junction temperature estimation.

Calculating FIT for a mission profile explains how use TI’s reliability de-rating tools to calculate a component

level FIT under power on conditions for a system mission profile.

Serial flash programming of C2000™ microcontrollers discusses using a flash kernel and ROM loaders for serial

programming a device.

11.5 Support Resources

TI E2E^™support forums are an engineer's go-to source for fast, verified answers and design help — straight

from the experts. Search existing answers or ask your own question to get the quick design help you need.

Linked content is provided "AS IS" by the respective contributors. They do not constitute TI specifications and do

not necessarily reflect TI's views; see TI's Terms of Use.

11.6 Trademarks

Code Composer Studio^™, MicroStar BGA^™, Delfino^™, TMS320C2000^™, TMS320^™, TI E2E^™are trademarks of

Texas Instruments.

eZdsp^™is a trademark of Spectrum Digital.

All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

11.7 Electrostatic Discharge Caution

This integrated circuit can be damaged by ESD. Texas Instruments recommends that all integrated circuits be handled

with appropriate precautions. Failure to observe proper handling and installation procedures can cause damage.

ESD damage can range from subtle performance degradation to complete device failure. Precision integrated circuits may

be more susceptible to damage because very small parametric changes could cause the device not to meet its published

specifications.

11.8 Glossary

TI Glossary

This glossary lists and explains terms, acronyms, and definitions.

138 Submit Document Feedback

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

TMS320F2809, TMS320F2808, TMS320F2806, TMS320F2802, TMS320F2801, TMS320C2802,

TMS320C2801, TMS320F28016, TMS320F28015

SPRS230P – OCTOBER 2003 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2021

www.ti.com

12 Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable Information

12.1 Packaging Information

The following pages include mechanical, packaging, and orderable information. This information is the most

current data available for the designated devices. This data is subject to change without notice and revision of

this document. For browser-based versions of this data sheet, refer to the left-hand navigation.

Submit Document Feedback 139

Product Folder Links: TMS320F2809 TMS320F2808 TMS320F2806 TMS320F2802 TMS320F2801

TMS320C2802 TMS320C2801 TMS320F28016 TMS320F28015

PACKAGE OUTLINE

NFBGA - 1.4 mm max height

PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY

NMF0100A

10.1

9.9

B

A

BALL A1 CORNER

10.1

9.9

1.4 MAX

C

SEATING PLANE

0.12 C

0.45

0.35

(1.4) TYP

7.2 TYP

K

J

H

G

F

SYMM

7.2

TYP

E

D

C

0.55

100X Ø

0.45

B

A

0.15

0.05

C A B

C

0.8 TYP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0.8 TYP

SYMM

4225038/A 08/2019

NOTES:

NanoFree is a trademark of Texas Instruments.

1. All linear dimensions are in millimeters. Any dimensions in parenthesis are for reference only. Dimensioning and tolerancing

per ASME Y14.5M.

2. This drawing is subject to change without notice.

www.ti.com

EXAMPLE BOARD LAYOUT

NFBGA - 1.4 mm max height

PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY

NMF0100A

SYMM

(0.8) TYP

A

B

(0.8) TYP

C

D

E

F

SYMM

G

H

J

100X (Ø 0.4)

K

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

LAND PATTERN EXAMPLE

SCALE: 8X

0.05 MIN

0.05 MAX

ALL AROUND

EXPOSED

METAL

METAL UNDER

SOLDER MASK

(Ø 0.40)

SOLDER MASK

OPENING

(Ø 0.40)

METAL

SOLDER MASK

OPENING

EXPOSED

METAL

NON- SOLDER MASK

DEFINED

SOLDER MASK

DEFINED

(PREFERRED)

SOLDER MASK DETAILS

NOT TO SCALE

4225038/A 08/2019

NOTES: (continued)

3. Final dimensions may vary due to manufacturing tolerance considerations and also routing constraints. Refer to Texas Instruments

Literature number SNVA009 (www.ti.com/lit/snva009).

www.ti.com

EXAMPLE STENCIL DESIGN

NFBGA - 1.4 mm max height

PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY

NMF0100A

SYMM

(0.8) TYP

A

B

(0.8) TYP

C

D

E

F

SYMM

G

H

J

100X (Ø 0.4)

K

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SOLDER PASTE EXAMPLE

BASED ON 0.150 mm THICK STENCIL

SCALE: 8X

4225038/A 08/2019

NOTES: (continued)

4. Laser cutting apertures with trapezoidal walls and rounded corners may offer better paste release.

www.ti.com

MECHANICAL DATA

MPBG028B FEBRUARY 1997 – REVISED MAY 2002

GGM (S–PBGA–N100)

PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY

10,10

9,90

SQ

7,20 TYP

0,80

0,40

K

J

H

G

F

E

D

C

B

A

A1 Corner

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Bottom View

0,95

0,85

1,40 MAX

Seating Plane

0,10

0,55

0,45

0,08

0,45

0,35

4145257–3/C 12/01

NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters.

B. This drawing is subject to change without notice

C. MicroStar BGA configuration.

1

POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265

PACKAGE OUTLINE

NFBGA - 1.4 mm max height

PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY

GBA0100A

A

10.1

9.9

B

BALL A1 CORNER

10.1

9.9

1.4 MAX

C

SEATING PLANE

0.12 C

0.45

0.35

BALL TYP

7.2 TYP

(1.4) TYP

K

(1.4) TYP

J

H

G

F

SYMM

7.2

TYP

E

D

C

0.55

100X Ø

0.45

B

A

0.8 TYP

0.15

0.05

C A B

C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

0.8 TYP

SYMM

4224887/A 05/2019

NanoFree is a trademark of Texas Instruments.

NOTES:

1. All linear dimensions are in millimeters. Any dimensions in parenthesis are for reference only. Dimensioning and tolerancing

per ASME Y14.5M.

2. This drawing is subject to change without notice.

www.ti.com

EXAMPLE BOARD LAYOUT

NFBGA - 1.4 mm max height

PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY

GBA0100A

(0.8) TYP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

A

B

(0.8) TYP

C

D

E

F

SYMM

G

H

J

100X (Ø0.4)

K

SYMM

LAND PATTERN EXAMPLE

SCALE: 8X

0.05 MIN

0.05 MAX

ALL AROUND

EXPOSED

METAL

METAL UNDER

SOLDER MASK

(Ø 0.25)

SOLDER MASK

OPENING

(Ø 0.25)

METAL

SOLDER MASK

OPENING

EXPOSED

METAL

NON- SOLDER MASK

DEFINED

SOLDER MASK

DEFINED

(PREFERRED)

SOLDER MASK DETAILS

NOT TO SCALE

4224887/A 05/2019

NOTES: (continued)

3. Final dimensions may vary due to manufacturing tolerance considerations and also routing constraints. Refer to Texas Instruments

Literature number SNVA009 (www.ti.com/lit/snva009).

www.ti.com

EXAMPLE STENCIL DESIGN

NFBGA - 1.4 mm max height

PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY

GBA0100A

(0.8) TYP

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

A

B

(0.8) TYP

C

D

E

F

SYMM

G

H

J

100X (Ø0.4)

K

SYMM

SOLDER PASTE EXAMPLE

BASED ON 0.150 mm THICK STENCIL

SCALE: 8X

4224887/A 05/2019

NOTES: (continued)

4. Laser cutting apertures with trapezoidal walls and rounded corners may offer better paste release.

www.ti.com

MECHANICAL DATA

MTQF013A – OCTOBER 1994 – REVISED DECEMBER 1996

PZ (S-PQFP-G100)

PLASTIC QUAD FLATPACK

0,27

0,17

0,50

75

M

0,08

51

50

76

26

100

0,13 NOM

1

25

12,00 TYP

Gage Plane

14,20

SQ

13,80

0,25

16,20

SQ

0,05 MIN

0°–7°

15,80

1,45

1,35

0,75

0,45

Seating Plane

0,08

1,60 MAX

4040149/B 11/96

NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters.

B. This drawing is subject to change without notice.

C. Falls within JEDEC MS-026

1

POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265

IMPORTANT NOTICE AND DISCLAIMER

TI PROVIDES TECHNICAL AND RELIABILITY DATA (INCLUDING DATASHEETS), DESIGN RESOURCES (INCLUDING REFERENCE

DESIGNS), APPLICATION OR OTHER DESIGN ADVICE, WEB TOOLS, SAFETY INFORMATION, AND OTHER RESOURCES “AS IS”

AND WITH ALL FAULTS, AND DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD

PARTY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.

These resources are intended for skilled developers designing with TI products. You are solely responsible for (1) selecting the appropriate

TI products for your application, (2) designing, validating and testing your application, and (3) ensuring your application meets applicable

standards, and any other safety, security, or other requirements. These resources are subject to change without notice. TI grants you

permission to use these resources only for development of an application that uses the TI products described in the resource. Other

reproduction and display of these resources is prohibited. No license is granted to any other TI intellectual property right or to any third party

intellectual property right. TI disclaims responsibility for, and you will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against, any claims, damages,

costs, losses, and liabilities arising out of your use of these resources.

TI’s products are provided subject to TI’s Terms of Sale (https:www.ti.com/legal/termsofsale.html) or other applicable terms available either

on ti.com or provided in conjunction with such TI products. TI’s provision of these resources does not expand or otherwise alter TI’s

applicable warranties or warranty disclaimers for TI products.IMPORTANT NOTICE

Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265


型号：	TMS320F2801-Q1
厂家：	TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
描述：	TMS320F280x, TMS320C280x, TMS320F2801x digital signal processors
文件：	总155页 (文件大小：3871K)
中文：	中文翻译
下载：	下载PDF数据表文档文件

TMS320F2801-Q1 [TI]

相关型号：

TMS320F28015

TMS320F28015-Q1

TMS320F28015GGM

TMS320F28015NMFA

TMS320F28015PZ

TMS320F28015PZA

TMS320F28015PZQ

TMS320F28015PZS

TMS320F28015PZSR

TMS320F28015ZGM

TMS320F28015ZGMA

TMS320F28016